Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 950

BTS3900A

Installation Guide for Enhancing


Existing Cabinets
Issue

06

Date

2014-04-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

About This Document

About This Document


Overview
The BTS3900A (with breathable film), (Ver.A), (Ver.B), and (Ver.C) cabinets can be enhanced
to the same capacity as the BTS3900A (Ver.D). After being enhanced, the BTS3900A (with
breathable film) cabinets is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1), the BTS3900A (Ver.A) is named
(Ver.D_A2), the BTS3900A (Ver.B) is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_B), and BTS3900A (Ver.C)
is named BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).
This document describes the process for installing the cabinet, boards, modules, and cables in
the enhancement of BTS3900A. It also provides checklist for hardware installation.

Product Version
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name

Product Version

BTS3900A WCDMA

V200R013C00 and later versions

BTS3900A LTE

V100R003C00 and later versions

BTS3900A GSM

V100R013C00 and later versions

BTS3900A

V100R004C00 and later versions

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l

Base station installation personnel

Organization
1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

About This Document

This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing
Cabinets.
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.C)
to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).
3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.B)
to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).
4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A
(Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).
5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1)
This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A (with
breathable film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).

Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personal
injury.
Calls attention to important information, best practices and
tips.
NOTE is used to address information not related to personal
injury, equipment damage, and environment deterioration.

General Conventions
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

About This Document

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in


Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

About This Document

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt


+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means


the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving


the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.............1
2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)...................................................4
2.1 Installation Preparations.................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check......................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.2 Upgrade Preparations..................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.3 Documents...................................................................................................................................................................6
2.1.4 Tools and Instruments.................................................................................................................................................7
2.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel............................................................................................................8
2.2 Application Scenarios.....................................................................................................................................................8
2.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs Only.........................................................................8
2.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs and RRUs..............................................................20
2.3 Unpacking Check.........................................................................................................................................................29
2.4 Restructuring Process...................................................................................................................................................30
2.5 Powering Off the Base Station.....................................................................................................................................32
2.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet.............................................................................................................................35
2.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.......................................................................35
2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door..........................................................................................................................................46
2.6.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly.....................................................................................................................................51
2.6.4 Replacing the ELU....................................................................................................................................................54
2.6.5 Replacing the Power System.....................................................................................................................................57
2.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee........................................................................................................64
2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.................................................................................................................................66
2.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.............................................................................................................................72
2.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.........................................................72
2.7.2 Replacing the Front Door..........................................................................................................................................83
2.7.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly.....................................................................................................................................88
2.7.4 Replacing the ELU....................................................................................................................................................90
2.7.5 Replacing the DCDU.................................................................................................................................................93
2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.................................................................................................................................97
2.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................100
2.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................100
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Contents

2.8.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................106


2.8.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................108
2.8.4 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................111
2.8.5 Replacing the RFU..................................................................................................................................................115
2.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box..............................................................................................................118
2.8.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................120
2.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet..................................................................................................125
2.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet...............................125
2.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................130
2.9.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................135
2.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................138
2.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables...................................................................................................142
2.10.1 Installing the BBU Case........................................................................................................................................142
2.10.2 Installing the BBU Components............................................................................................................................147
2.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B....................................................................................................................150
2.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................154
2.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.C)...............................................................................154
2.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................167
2.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................192
2.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................199
2.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................204
2.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................225
2.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................234
2.11.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................239
2.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable......................................................................................................................241
2.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable...............................................................................................243
2.12 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................245
2.13 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................249
2.14 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................260
2.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................260
2.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets......................................................................................................................................260
2.14.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................263

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)................................................266


3.1 Installation Preparations.............................................................................................................................................268
3.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check..................................................................................................................................................268
3.1.2 Upgrade Preparations..............................................................................................................................................268
3.1.3 Documents...............................................................................................................................................................268
3.1.4 Tools and Instruments.............................................................................................................................................269
3.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel........................................................................................................270
3.2 Application Scenarios.................................................................................................................................................270
3.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs Only.....................................................................270
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Contents

3.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs and RRUs............................................................282


3.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................291
3.4 Restructuring Process.................................................................................................................................................292
3.5 Powering Off the Base Station...................................................................................................................................294
3.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................297
3.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.....................................................................297
3.6.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................308
3.6.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................313
3.6.4 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................316
3.6.5 Replacing the Power System...................................................................................................................................319
3.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee......................................................................................................326
3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................328
3.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................334
3.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet.......................................................334
3.7.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................345
3.7.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................350
3.7.4 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................352
3.7.5 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................355
3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................359
3.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................362
3.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................362
3.8.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................368
3.8.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................370
3.8.4 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................373
3.8.5 Replacing the RFU..................................................................................................................................................377
3.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box..............................................................................................................380
3.8.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................382
3.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet..................................................................................................387
3.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet...............................387
3.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................392
3.9.3 Replacing the ELU..................................................................................................................................................397
3.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................400
3.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables...................................................................................................404
3.10.1 Installing the BBU Case........................................................................................................................................404
3.10.2 Installing the BBU Components............................................................................................................................409
3.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B....................................................................................................................412
3.10.4 Installing the Air Baffle.........................................................................................................................................416
3.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................417
3.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.B)...............................................................................417
3.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................431
3.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................456
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Contents

3.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................463


3.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................468
3.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................489
3.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................498
3.11.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................503
3.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable......................................................................................................................505
3.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable...............................................................................................507
3.12 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................509
3.13 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................513
3.14 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................524
3.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................524
3.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets......................................................................................................................................524
3.14.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................527

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).............................................530


4.1 Introduction to Upgrade..............................................................................................................................................532
4.1.1 Restrcutured Cabinets Interior.................................................................................................................................532
4.1.2 Restructuring Process..............................................................................................................................................540
4.2 Installation Preparations.............................................................................................................................................542
4.2.1 Pre-upgrade Check..................................................................................................................................................542
4.2.2 Upgrade Preparations..............................................................................................................................................543
4.2.3 Document Preparations............................................................................................................................................543
4.2.4 Tools and Instruments.............................................................................................................................................543
4.2.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel........................................................................................................544
4.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................545
4.4 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................546
4.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30H.....................................................................546
4.4.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................551
4.4.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................554
4.4.4 Installing an ELU.....................................................................................................................................................556
4.4.5 Replacing the Power System...................................................................................................................................557
4.4.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee......................................................................................................563
4.4.7 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module...................................................................................................................564
4.4.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................564
4.5 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet...........................................................................................................................569
4.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC11H.....................................................................569
4.5.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................576
4.5.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................579
4.5.4 Installing an ELU.....................................................................................................................................................581
4.5.5 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................582
4.5.6 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module...................................................................................................................584
4.5.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................585
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Contents

4.6 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................588


4.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................589
4.6.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................592
4.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel...................................................................................................593
4.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02.........................................................................................................................................595
4.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFU.................................................................................................................................597
4.6.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................601
4.7 Restructuring the IBBS200T......................................................................................................................................606
4.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the IBBS200T...................................................................606
4.7.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................610
4.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................614
4.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable.................................................................................................617
4.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables.....................................................................................................620
4.9.1 Installing a BBU Case.............................................................................................................................................620
4.9.2 Installing the BBU Components..............................................................................................................................624
4.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06......................................................................................................................627
4.9.4 Installing the SLPU.................................................................................................................................................636
4.10 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................638
4.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two Cabinets...........................................................................................................638
4.10.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................652
4.10.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................669
4.10.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................677
4.10.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................684
4.10.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................696
4.10.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................705
4.10.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................709
4.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables........................................................................................................712
4.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables...................................................................................................713
4.11 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................715
4.12 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................720
4.13 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................730
4.13.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................730
4.13.2 Sealing Cable Holes...............................................................................................................................................730
4.13.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................733

5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1).................736


5.1 Introduction to Upgrade..............................................................................................................................................738
5.1.1 Restructured Cabinets Interior.................................................................................................................................738
5.1.2 Restructuring Process..............................................................................................................................................746
5.2 Installation Preparations.............................................................................................................................................748
5.2.1 Pre-upgrade Check..................................................................................................................................................748
5.2.2 Upgrade Preparations..............................................................................................................................................749
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Contents

5.2.3 Document Preparations............................................................................................................................................749


5.2.4 Tools and Instruments.............................................................................................................................................749
5.2.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel........................................................................................................750
5.3 Unpacking Check.......................................................................................................................................................751
5.4 Restructuring the APM30...........................................................................................................................................752
5.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the APM30........................................................................752
5.4.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................758
5.4.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................761
5.4.4 Removing the APMI................................................................................................................................................763
5.4.5 Replacing the AFMU...............................................................................................................................................764
5.4.6 Replacing the Power System...................................................................................................................................766
5.4.7 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee......................................................................................................773
5.4.8 Installing the Filler Module and Filler Panel...........................................................................................................774
5.4.9 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................774
5.5 Restructuring the TMC...............................................................................................................................................780
5.5.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the TMC............................................................................781
5.5.2 Replacing the Front Door........................................................................................................................................785
5.5.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................788
5.5.4 Removing the APMI................................................................................................................................................790
5.5.5 Replacing the AFMU...............................................................................................................................................791
5.5.6 Replacing the DCDU...............................................................................................................................................794
5.5.7 Installing the Filler Module and Filler Panel...........................................................................................................796
5.5.8 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................796
5.6 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet...................................................................................................................................802
5.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC.............................................................................802
5.6.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly...................................................................................................................................806
5.6.3 Replacing the FMUA Assembly and Filler Panel...................................................................................................807
5.6.4 Replacing the DCDU-02.........................................................................................................................................809
5.6.5 (Optional) Replacing the RFU.................................................................................................................................811
5.6.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................815
5.7 Restructuring the BBC................................................................................................................................................820
5.7.1 Information You Need to Known Before Reconstructing the BBC........................................................................820
5.7.2 Replacing the Wiring Terminals and Circuit Breakers............................................................................................825
5.7.3 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet...............................................................................828
5.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable.................................................................................................831
5.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables.....................................................................................................834
5.9.1 Installing a BBU Case.............................................................................................................................................834
5.9.2 Installing the BBU Components..............................................................................................................................837
5.9.3 Installing the ODM06D-2 or OFD06......................................................................................................................840
5.9.4 (Optional) Installing the Filler Module...................................................................................................................850
5.9.5 Installing the SLPU.................................................................................................................................................851
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Contents

5.10 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets.................................................................................................................853


5.10.1 Changes of Cables Between Two Cabinets...........................................................................................................853
5.10.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets..............................................................................................................862
5.10.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios...............................................................................878
5.10.4 Installing Transmission Cables..............................................................................................................................886
5.10.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC Scenarios.............................................................893
5.10.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios..................................................901
5.10.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables.....................................................................................................907
5.10.8 Installing the RF Jumper........................................................................................................................................911
5.10.9 (Optional) Installing CPRI Electrical Cables........................................................................................................914
5.10.10 (Optional) Installing CPRI Fiber Optic Cables...................................................................................................915
5.11 Installation Checklist................................................................................................................................................917
5.12 Powering On a Base Station.....................................................................................................................................922
5.13 Subsequent Operations.............................................................................................................................................932
5.13.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door..................................................................................................................932
5.13.2 Sealing Cable Holes...............................................................................................................................................932
5.13.3 Repainting..............................................................................................................................................................935

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xii

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing


Existing Cabinets

Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide


for Enhancing Existing Cabinets
This chapter describes the changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing
Cabinets.

06 (2014-04-30)
This is the sixth commercial release.
Compared with 05 (2013-11-08), no topic is added or deleted from this issue.
Compared with 05 (2013-11-08), this issue incorporates the following change:
Topic

Change Description

2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door

Add the step of replacing an N-shaped fixing bracket


of the door support lever.

05 (2013-11-08)
This is the fifth commercial release.
Compared with 04 (2013-07-30), no topic is added or deleted from this issue.
Compared with 04 (2013-07-30), this issue incorporates the following change:
Topic

Change Description

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A


(Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)'s
child topics.

The filler module in APM30H(Ver.D_B) and


TMC11H(Ver.D_B) is replaced with air baffle.

04 (2013-07-30)
This is the fourth commercial release.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing


Existing Cabinets

Compared with 03 (2013-04-28), this issue is added with the following topics:
l

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C) and it's child topics.

Compared with 03 (2013-04-28), no information is modified or deleted.

03 (2013-04-28)
This is the third commercial release.
Compared with 02 (2012-12-30), no topic is added or deleted.
Compared with 02 (2012-12-30), this issue incorporates the following change:
Topic

Change Description

The whole document

Changed the document name from BTS3900A


Hardware Upgrade Guide to BTS3900A Installation
Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets.

l 2.11.7 (Optional) Installing


Inter-BBU Signal Cables

Modified the steps of binding and routing the interBBU signal cable.

l 4.10.7 (Optional) Installing


Inter-BBU Signal Cables
l 5.10.7 (Optional) Installing
Inter-BBU Signal Cables
2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door

Changed the steps of removing the front door.

02 (2012-12-30)
This is the second commercial release.
Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), this issue is added with the following topics:
l

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) and it's child topics.

5 Upgrade from BTS3900A (with Breathable Film) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A1) and it's
child topics.

Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), no information is modified.


Compared with 01 (2012-11-08), no information is deleted.

01 (2012-11-08)
This is the first commercial release.
Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), no topic is added.
Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

1 Changes in the BTS3900A Installation Guide for Enhancing


Existing Cabinets

Topic

Change Description

The whole document

Renamed the BTS3900A (Ver.D2_B) BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B).

2.10.1 Installing the BBU Case

Added the attentions of installing BBU power cables


on a running base station.

l (Optional) Installing the RRU


Power Cable

Added the attentions of installing RRU power cables


on a running base station.

l (Optional) Installing the RRU


Power Cable

Compared with Draft B (2012-10-10), this issue deletes the following topics:
l

"Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.D1) to BTS3900A (Ver.D2)" and it's child topics.

Draft B (2012-10-10)
This is a draft.
Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), this issue is added with the following topics:
l

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B) and it's child topics.

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), no information is changed.


Compared with issue Draft A (2012-09-15), no information is deleted.

Draft A (2012-09-15)
This is a draft.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to


BTS3900A (Ver.D_C)

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.C)
to BTS3900A (Ver.D_C).
2.1 Installation Preparations
This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also
specifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
2.2 Application Scenarios
Multiple cabinets can be configured and installed for the BTS3900A to meet the requirements
for different RF unit configurations, backup power capacity, and space for customer equipment.
A BTS3900A can be configured with only RFUs or both RFUs and RRUs depending on different
scenarios.
2.3 Unpacking Check
Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
2.4 Restructuring Process
This section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade of BTS3900A
(Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C).
2.5 Powering Off the Base Station
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for powering off the base station.
2.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30H
cabinet to be restructured.
2.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11H
cabinet to be restructured.
2.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFC
cabinet to be restructured.
2.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.
2.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables
This chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting the
modules to external devices.
2.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinets
during the upgrade.
2.12 Installation Checklist
After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cable-related items.
2.13 Powering On a Base Station
This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply
to the components in a cabinet.
2.14 Subsequent Operations
This section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgraded
and checked.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

2.1 Installation Preparations


This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also
specifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.

2.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check


This section describes the operations that must be taken before the hardware upgrade.
You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:
l

Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properly
before the upgrade.

Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.
Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need to
contact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.

2.1.2 Upgrade Preparations


This section describes the preparations needed for the upgrade.
Table 2-1 lists the requirements on the current software version of the base station before the
upgrade.
Table 2-1 Versions before the upgrade
Product Name

Version before Upgrade

SingleRAN7.0 series

V100R007C00SPC240 and later

SingleRAN6.0 series

V100R004C00SPC190 and later

2.1.3 Documents
This section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.
l

Before the installation, familiarize yourself with related information in the following
documents:
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Cables
BBU3900 Hardware Description
RFU Hardware Description
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Site Maintenance Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Site Maintenance
Guide
Safety Precautions

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

During the installation, refer to the following document:


Installation Reference

2.1.4 Tools and Instruments


This section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.
Marker

Phillips screwdriver (M3 to


M6)

Diagonal pliers

Flat-head screwdriver (M3 to


M6)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

32 mm (1.26 in.)
combination wrench

Socket wrench

Torque wrench

Power cable crimping tool

RJ45 crimping tool

Cable cutter

Rubber mallet

Soldering iron

Wire stripper

Hammer drill (16)

Heat gun

Level

Multimeter

Measuring tape

Vacuum cleaner

ESD wrist strap

ESD gloves

Torque screwdriver

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Gloves

2.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel


Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite
personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:
l

The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with the
proper installation and operation methods.

The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installation
environment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary.

2.2 Application Scenarios


Multiple cabinets can be configured and installed for the BTS3900A to meet the requirements
for different RF unit configurations, backup power capacity, and space for customer equipment.
A BTS3900A can be configured with only RFUs or both RFUs and RRUs depending on different
scenarios.

2.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs


Only
When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the
BTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and -48 V DC power supply
scenario.

Cabinet Configuration Principles


l

A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.

The maximum cabinet configuration of a BTS3900A site is 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2


RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. There must be a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) between
the cabinets installed side by side.

The RFC can only be stacked below the APM30H or TMC11H.

The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or
TMC11H. The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can only be stacked below the TMC11H.

When a site is configured with over six RFUs and only one IBBS200D or IBBS200T, the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T must be configured with at least two groups of 92 Ah storage
batteries to avoid overcurrent of a single battery group during discharging.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

If an auxiliary cabinet such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H is required during


initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic
cabinet. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet
is positioned on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the
battery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.

During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In a
special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.

When a BTS3900A is configured with two BBUs and both BBUs are connected to RFUs,
the BBUs must be interconnected.

A BTS3900A configured with one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by
default. It can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption
of all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to a new or expansion
scenario.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-mode Base Station


A single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, and the BBU is installed
in the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs are
required.
Table 2-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or
220 V AC

No backup
power

5U

6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

5U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs

16 U

6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H

16 U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
TMC11H

5U

6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T

5U

12 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
one battery
cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

16 U

6 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H

Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets

-48 V DC

16 U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H

5U

6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

5U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

16 U

6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H

16 U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H

9U

6 RFUs

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

12 RFUs

1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

6 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

12 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

20 U

In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment
and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-1 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is no
backup power

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 2-1 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1 TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1
APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original
configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H.

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,
the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-2 and
Figure 2-3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by an IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site,
the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-4.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by two battery cabinets

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 2-4 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H is the initial
configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations
are shown in Figure 2-5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 2-5 are two modes of configuring 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (A) indicates that 2
TMC11Hs+2 RFCs is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original
configuration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC.

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station


Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l

Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30H
and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

Table 2-3 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different backup
power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or
220 V AC

No backup
power

3U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs

(1)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Backup
power
provided by
a single
battery
cabinet

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

14 U

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
TMC11H

3U

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

14 U

l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H

-48 V DC

Backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets

3U

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

14 U

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H

7U

1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

18 U

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

NOTE

(1) A maximum of 12 RFUs are supported by a triple-mode base station. If there are more than 12 RFUs,
an extra base station is required.

In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment are
shown in Figure 2-6.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is not
required

When a single cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-7.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-7 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by a single battery cabinet

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
with different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 2-8.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by two battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
shown in Figure 2-9.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-9 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

2.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs


and RRUs
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the
BTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and 48 V DC power supply
scenario.

Cabinet Configuration Principles


l

A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.
Therefore, more than one BTS3900As must be deployed if more than six RFUs and nine
RRUs are required.

When a BTS3900A is configured with both RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is needed to
be installed in RFC, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2*60 W and three
RRUs of 2*40 W.

When both the RFU and RRU support the GSM mode, the BBU3900 must be configured
with a GTMUb. In addition, the RFUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the
GTMUb, and the RRUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station


A single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the
APM30H or TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 2-4 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or
220 V AC

No backup
power

5U

6 RFUs+9
RRUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
one storage
battery
cabinet

5U

16 U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

16 U

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H

-48 V DC

Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
two storage
battery
cabinets

5U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

16 U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H

9U

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

20 U

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment
and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-10.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-10 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is
no backup power

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,
the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by one battery cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site,
the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by two battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode


base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC
scenario

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station


Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l

Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30H
and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 2-5 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different backup
power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 2-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or
220 V AC

No backup
power

3U

6 RFUs+9
RRUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

Backup
power
provided by
a single
battery
cabinet

3U

14 U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

14 U

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H

-48 V DC

Backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets

3U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+4
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

14 U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+4
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H

7U

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

18 U

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment and
carrier configurations are shown in Figure 2-14.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-14 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is not
required

When a single battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
2-15 and Figure 2-16.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-15 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by one IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-16 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by one IBBS700D/IBBS700T

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
2-17.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-17 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by two battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in
the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown
in Figure 2-18.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-18 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

2.3 Unpacking Check


Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.

Context
NOTE

When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l

Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.

Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweatsoaked gloves, or dirty gloves.

NOTICE
l Powered on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

If...

Then...

The total number tallies with the packing


list

Go to Step 2.

The total number does not tally with the


packing list

Find out the cause and report any missing


articles to the local Huawei office.

Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.


If...

Then...

The exterior of the packing case is intact

Go to Step 3.

The outer packing is severely damaged or Find out the cause and report any missing
soaked
articles to the local Huawei office.
The mark on the shockwatch label is red.

Do not open the case. Claim compensation


from the transportation company.

Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list.
If...

Then...

Types and quantity of the article tally with Sign the Packing List with the customer.
those on the packing list
There are any goods missing, incorrectly
delivered, or damaged

Send feedback to the local Huawei office.

CAUTION
To protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep the
unpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment,
packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file the
photos.
----End

2.4 Restructuring Process


This section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade of BTS3900A
(Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Restructuring Process in AC Scenarios


Figure 2-19 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied with
AC power.
Figure 2-19 Restructuring process

Restructuring Process in DC Scenarios


Figure 2-20 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied with
DC power.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-20 Restructuring process

2.5 Powering Off the Base Station


This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for powering off the base station.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Context
From MBTS V100R009C00 onwards, the name of the element management system (EMS) is
changed from M2000 to U2000.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If a replaced RFU is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking for TX
channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
NOTE

l If a replaced RFU is faulty, its maximum output power locking for TX channels does not need to be
disabled.
l If the maximum output power has not been set for the RFU, the maximum output power for TX channels
is the maximum transmit power of the hardware.

1.

Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, and
record the result.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet
number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run the
DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,
and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power for
TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the
cabinet number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU.
Run the DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number,
slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum
output power for TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has
been locked.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site Maintenance
Terminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-click
Lock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Query Config tab. On the displayed tab page,
select the target RFU.
If...

Then...

The maximum output power has been


locked for TX channels

Go to Step 1.2.

The maximum output power has not been


locked for TX channels

Go to 2.

NOTE

The maximum output power of some RFUs cannot be queried by running the DSP TXBRANCH
command. If the value of the maximum output power invalid in the query result for an RFU, the RFU
does not support the maximum output power locking.

2.

Set the maximum output power of the RFU to 0 to disable the maximum output power
locking.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable the
maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to reset

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum output
power of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable
the maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to
reset the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum
output power of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site Maintenance
Terminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-click
Lock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Config tab. On the displayed tab page, set
the parameters to disable the maximum output power locking for TX channels, and click
Set. Reset the RFU to make the configuration take effect.
NOTE

If there is more than one RFU, reset the TX channels of each RFU separately. If RFUs are cascaded,
perform the operations from the lowest-level RFU to the highest-level RFU to minimize the impact
on services carried by the RFUs.

Step 2 Ask the M2000/U2000 administrator to block the RFU.


l On the NodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the eNodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the BSC, run the SET GTRXADMSTAT command and set ADMSTAT to LOCK to
block all carriers of the RFU.
NOTE

l Block the RFU before replacing the module or separately replacing the RF jumper.
l If RFU to be replaced works in multiple modes, block the RFU in all modes it supports.
l An RFU working in GSM mode cannot be blocked, and therefore you can block only the carriers of
the RFU in GSM mode.

Step 3 Verify that TX channels of the RFU are disabled. In this case, the ACT indicator on the RFU
panel is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).
Step 4 Power off the RFC.
If...

Then...

RFC(Ver.B)

Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 in the RFC.

RFC(Ver.C)

Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11A in the RFC.

Step 5 Power off the TMC.


If...

Then...

TMC11H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C in the
TMC.
TMC11H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C in the
TMC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 6 Switch off all circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200T or IBBS200D.
Step 7 Power off the APM30H.
If...

Then...

APM30H(Ver.B)

Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPS in the APM30H.

APM30H(Ver.C)

Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPU in the APM30H.

Step 8 Turn off the switch on the external power equipment for the BTS3900A.
----End

2.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30H
cabinet to be restructured.

2.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the


APM30H
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and added
during the restructuring of the APM30H.

Component Changes in the APM30H


Figure 2-21 shows component changes in the APM30H.
Figure 2-21 Components in the APM30H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

FAN 02A

To be
replace
d

The FAN 02A needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D to


enhance the heat dissipation capability.

SLPU

Reused

ELU

To be
replace
d

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needs


to be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.

PSU (AC/
DC)

To be
replace
d

The PSUs need to be replaced to enhance the power


distribution capability.

Door status
sensor

Reused

EPS 01
subrack

To be
replace
d

The EPS 01 subrack needs to be replaced with an


EPU05A to meet higher requirements for the power
system.

BBU3900

Reused

GATM

To be
remove
d

EMUA

Reused

10

AC heater

Reused

11

SOU

Reused

12

Front door

To be
replace
d

The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heat


dissipation capacity of the cabinet.

13

Junction
box

Reused

14

PMU

To be
replace
d

The PMU needs to be replaced to enhance the power


distribution capability.

15

FAN 02B

To be
replace
d

The FAN 02B needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D to


enhance the heat dissipation capability.

16

EPU03A
subrack

To be
replace
d

The EPS 03A subrack needs to be replaced with an


EPU05A to meet higher requirements for the power
system.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

17

Front door

To be
replace
d

The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heat


dissipation capacity of the cabinet.

Cable Changes in the APM30H


Figure 2-22 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30H.
Figure 2-22 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
1

Input
power
cable for
a
junction
box

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the L1
and N1
terminals
in the AC
OUTPUT
terminal
box of the
EPS.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
L1 and N1
terminals in the
AC OUTPUT
terminal box of
the EPU.

Power
cable for
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l One end
connects
to the
LOAD0
port on
the EPS.
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on the fan
assembly
in the
APM30H
.

Reu
sed

l The other end


connects to the
L and N
terminals in the
junction box.

l The other
end
connects
to the L
and N
terminals
in the
junction
box.
P
2

Cha
nge
Typ
e

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects to the
LOAD5 port on
the EPU.

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in the
APM30H.

38

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
3

BBU
power
cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connects
to the
LOAD1
port on
the EPS.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connects to the
BBU_0 or
BBU_1 port on
the EPU.

l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

P
4

EMUA
power
cable

l Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
l The other
end is
cord end
terminals.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l The other
end
connects
to the
-48V port
on the
UPEU in
the BBU.
l One end
connects
to the
LOAD7
port on
the EPS.
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.

l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
l The other
end is
cord end
terminals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Cha
nge
Typ
e
To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU.

l One end
connects to the
LOAD4 port on
the EPU.
l The other end
connects to the
PWR1 port on
the EMUA.

The
y
can
be
used
cont
inuo
usly
and
their
conn
ecto
rs
need
to be
repl
aced
onsit
e.

39

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
5

SOU
power
cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

l One end
is OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the M4
ground
screw,
L1, and
N1
terminals
(AC
OUTPUT
) on the
EPS.

l One end
is OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
M4 ground
screw, L1, and
N1 terminals
(AC OUTPUT)
on the EPU.

l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.

l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.

Cha
nge
Typ
e
Reu
sed

l The other end


connects to the
AC INPUT port
on the SOU.

l The other
end
connects
to the AC
INPUT
port on
the SOU.
P
6

Heater
power
cable

l One end
is OT
terminals.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.

l One end
connects
to the AC
output
wiring
terminal
in the AC
junction
box and
the
ground
bar in the
APM30H
cabinet

l One end
is OT
terminals.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
input port
on the
heater.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects to the
AC output
wiring terminal
in the AC
junction box
and the ground
bar in the
APM30H
cabinet

Reu
sed

l The other end


connects to the
power input
port on the
heater.

40

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
7

Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

Cha
nge
Typ
e

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.

To
be
repl
aced

l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.

l The other end


connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.

Figure 2-23 shows the signal cable changes in the APM30H.


Figure 2-23 Signal cable changes in the APM30H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S1

Cable

Environmen
t monitoring
signal cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are DB50
male
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
COM
port on
the
PMU.

Both ends
are DB50
male
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
COM
port on
the
PMU.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
PMU_D
B50 port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S2

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status
sensor in the
APM30H

l One end
is a 2-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.

Remove
d

l The
other end
connects
to the
PMU_D
B50 port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
l One end
is a 2-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

42

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S3

Cable

Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port
on the
PMU.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port on
the
PMU.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S4

CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.

Change
Type

To be
replaced

l The
other end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
-

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connects
to the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU in
the
BBU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S5

Cable

ELU signal
cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S6

Monitoring
signal cable
for the fan in
the front
door

Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
transfer
box in
the front
door of
the
APM30
H.

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
FAN_E
XT port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects
to the
transfer
box in
the front
door of
the
APM30
H.

To be
replaced

l The
other end
connects
to the
FAN_E
XT port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.

44

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S7

Cable

EMUA
monitoring
signal cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

l One end
is a DB9
male
connecto
r.

l One end
connects
to the
RS-485
port on
the
EMUA.

l One end
is a DB9
male
connecto
r.

l One end
connects
to the
RS-485
port on
the
EMUA.

l The
other is
an RJ45
connecto
r.

S8

Surge
protection
transfer
cable for the
monitoring
signals

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
PMU.
l One end
connects
to the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.

l The
other is
an RJ45
connecto
r.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
EXT_A
LM0
port on
the
UPEU in
the
BBU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
PMU.
l One end
connects
to the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
EXT_A
LM0
port on
the
UPEU in
the BBU.

45

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S9

Cable

GPS clock
signal cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

l One end
is an
SMA
male
connecto
r.

l One end
connects
to the
GPS port
on the
USCU in
the
BBU.

l One end
is an
SMA
male
connecto
r.

l One end
connects
to the
GPS port
on the
USCU in
the BBU.

l The
other
end is an
N-type
female
connecto
r.

S10

CMUEBBU
monitoring
signal cable

l The
other
end
connects
to a GPS
surge
protector
.
-

l The
other
end is an
N-type
female
connecto
r.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to a GPS
surge
protector
.

l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port on
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.

To be
replaced

l The
other end
connects
to the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU in
the BBU.

2.6.2 Replacing the Front Door


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door. The front doors
of the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures for removing
the front doors of the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needlenose pliers.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn off the fan in the front door.
If...

Then...

An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
APM30H assembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
(Ver.B) is
used
A
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker controls
TMC11H power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
(Ver.B) is
used
An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
APM30H assembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
(Ver.C) is
used
A
Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breaker controls
TMC11H power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
(Ver.C) is
used
Step 3 Remove the front door to be replaced.
1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Remove the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door from the transfer box, as
shown in Figure 2-24.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-24 Removing the connector from the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the
front door

2.

Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown
in Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25 Removing the equipotential cable for the door of the cabinet

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two hinges from the front door, and remove the
front door, as shown in Figure 2-26.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-26 Removing the front door

Step 4 Install the new front door.


NOTE

l When installing the front door, use new removable pins.


l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the front door before delivery.

1.

Install the new front door and insert the removable pins.

2.

Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on an inner wall.

Step 5 Replace an N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever.


1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Remove the two M4 screws on the left N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever
and pull out the door support lever from the right N-shaped fixing bracket. Then move the
left N-shaped fixing bracket to the right part of the door support lever and remove the left
N-shaped fixing bracket, as shown in the following figure.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-27 Remove an N-shaped fixing bracket

2.

Take out and slide a new N-shaped fixing bracket onto the right part of the door support
lever and move it to the left part of the lever. Use two M4 screws to secure the new Nshaped fixing bracket, with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), and place the right part of
the door support lever in its original position, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-28 Install a new N-shaped fixing bracket

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the number on
the barcode label starts from 212102, as shown by 1 in Figure 2-29.
If...

Then...

There is a barcode label in the indicated


position

Proceed with the next step.

There is no barcode label in the indicated


position

Record the barcode (shown by 2 in Figure


2-29) on the front door, and stick a barcode
label carrying the same barcode to the
indicated position.

Figure 2-29 Positions of the barcode labels

(1) Position of the barcode label on an inner wall of the (2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of the
cabinet
cabinet

Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.6.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The fan
assemblies in the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures
for removing the fan assemblies from the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
flat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Optional: Remove the power cable for the fan assembly to power off the fan assembly. Skip
this step if this cable has been disconnected during the replacement of the front door.
If...

Then...

An APM30H
(Ver.B) is used

Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
assembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.

A TMC11H
(Ver.B) is used

Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker
controls power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.

An APM30H
(Ver.C) is used

Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
assembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.

A TMC11H
(Ver.C) is used

Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breaker
controls power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.

Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.


1.

Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fan
assembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as
shown in Figure 2-30.
NOTE

The procedure for removing a fan assembly from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H
(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) are the same. Figure 2-30 uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-30 Removing the fan assembly

DANGER
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan
assembly.
Step 4 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position and tighten
the four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in
Figure 2-31. The recommended torque is 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
NOTE

When installing the new fan assembly, ensure that the air exhaust vent of the fan assembly is on the top.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-31 Installing the new fan assembly

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.6.4 Replacing the ELU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit
(ELU).

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 Position of the ELU

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1.

Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.

2.

Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,
as shown in Figure 2-33.
Figure 2-33 Opening the housing of the ELU

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown in
Figure 2-34.
Figure 2-34 Removing the ELU

Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.


Step 4 Install a new ELU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

NOTE

l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure
2-35. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 2-6.

Figure 2-35 Position of the barcode label

(1) Barcode label on the ELU

(2) BOM code

Table 2-6 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets


Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed base


station

l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macro


base station

l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission


equipment

l Ver.B: 02113830

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 and


uses the -48 V DC power supply

l Ver.B: 02113827

RFC (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113818

l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195

l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393

l Ver.C: 02113398

l Ver.C: 02113395

l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397

1.

Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. The
recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

2.

Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.

3.

Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic label
information of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplate
in the upgrade package.
l

If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.

If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.6.5 Replacing the Power System


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power system.

Prerequisites
Before replacing the power system, ensure that the entire base station has been powered off.

Context
l

Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.

The procedure for replacing the power system of the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H
(Ver.C) is the same. The figures in this section uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.

Figure 2-36 shows component changes in the AC/DC power system.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Figure 2-36 Component changes in the AC/DC power system

(1) PMU 01B

(2) PSU
(3) EPS 01
(EPW30-48A) subrack

(4) PSU
(PSU4850A)

(5) EPU03A
subrack

(6) PMU 11A

(8) EPU05A
subrack

(7) PSU
(R4850G2)

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove cables from the EPS or EPU.
1.

Disconnect the ground cable for the EPS or EPU from the ground bar on the inner left wall
of the cabinet.

2.

Loosen the two captive screws on the metal protective cover on the left side of the EPS or
EPU, and then remove the protective cover.

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the plastic protective covers from the AC input and
output wiring terminal blocks on the left side of the EPS or EPU.

4.

Record the connections of the AC input power cable and AC output power cable, and then
remove the cables.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

5.

Reinstall the two plastic protective covers, and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M4
screws to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).

6.

Record the connections of the DC power cables on the EPS or EPU panel, and then remove
the DC power cables.

7.

Record the connections of the DC power cables that are connected to the power cables on
the right side of the EPS or EPU, and then remove the DC power cables.

Step 3 Remove the PMU and all PSUs from the EPS or EPU.

NOTICE
The original EPS or EPU contains one PMU and three PSUs and therefore is heavy. You are
advised to remove the PMU and PSUs before removing the EPS or EPU.
1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of each
PSU.

2.

Pull the handle slightly to slide each PSU out of the subrack and remove each PSU from
the subrack, as shown in Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37 Removing the PSUs

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of the
PMU.

4.

Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU out of the subrack and remove the PMU from the
subrack, as shown in Figure 2-38.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-38 Removing the PMU

Step 4 Remove the plate for the power series 120 connector from the right side of the EPS or EPU, as
shown in Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-39 Removing the plate for the power series 120 connector

Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the remaining seven screws from both sides of the EPS or
EPU, and remove the EPS or EPU from the cabinet along the guide rails slowly, as shown in
Figure 2-40.

NOTICE
The EPS or EPU subrack is heavy. Therefore, you need to hold the subrack with one hand and
support the bottom with the other hand to slowly pull the subrack out of the cabinet. This prevents
the subrack from falling and ensures personal safety.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-40 Removing the EPS or EPU

Step 6 Remove the metal support from the left side of the EPS or EPU.
1.

Loosen the two captive screws on the cover plate of the metal support.

2.

Remove the two screws from the metal support and remove the metal support, as shown in
Figure 2-41.
Figure 2-41 Removing the metal support

Step 7 Place the removed EPS or EPU subrack, PSUs, PMU, and metal support into an ESD box or
bag.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 8 Optional: Install the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of
the cabinet. Only an APM30H (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an APM30H
(Ver.C) is used, skip this step.

CAUTION
If a guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will
increase by 2C to 3C at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report
overtemperature alarms if the environmental temperature is high.
1.

Remove the guide rails on the left side of the position where the EPS or EPU is originally
installed, as shown by a in Figure 2-42. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the screws.

2.

Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mounting
bar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton padding
contacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in Figure 2-42.

3.

Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 8.1 to secure the guide rails and tighten the screws
to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as shown by c in Step 8.1.

Figure 2-42 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left
side of the cabinet

Step 9 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet. If there are
other modules installed at the bottom of the cabinet, skip this step.
1.

Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton
padding for about 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in Figure 2-43.

2.

Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completely
strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of the
cabinet, as shown by b and c in Figure 2-43.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-43 Installing windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet

Step 10 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet, as shown in Figure
2-44.

CAUTION
If a guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will
increase by 2C to 3C at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report
overtemperature alarms if the environmental temperature is high.
1.

Remove the M6 screw at the bottom of the right mounting bar.

2.

Place the windproof cotton padding next to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use two M6
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-44 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet

Step 11 Install a new EPU.


1.

Place the new EPU on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the power system
into the cabinet.

2.

Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven panel screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.) and one
hex screw to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.) so that the EPU subrack is secured.

3.

Use M6x12 screws to secure the ground cable for the new EPU to the ground bar. The
recommended torque is 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).

----End

2.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee


This section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.

Prerequisites
l

The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. When
DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.

If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.

Procedure
Step 1 Power off the GATM. The following table lists the terminals that can be used by a GATM power
cable, which may differ from the actually used terminal.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

If...

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Then...

An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATM
APM30H power cable from the LOAD4 port on the EPS.
(Ver.B) is
used
If an
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATM
APM30H power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPU.
(Ver.C) is
used
Step 2 Remove the GATM.
1.

Remove the monitoring signal cable from the GATM panel.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the ground cable for the GATM. Then use a wrench
to remove the RF jumper from the GATM.

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, remove the
GATM, and secure the removed screws on their original positions on the mounting bar, as
shown in Figure 2-45.
NOTE

The method of removing the GATM from an APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as the method of removing it
from an APM30H (Ver.C). The following figure uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.

Figure 2-45 Removing the GATM

Step 3 Remove the Bias-Tee.


1.

Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable and PGND cable.

2.

Remove the Bias-Tee.

3.

Use a wrench to connect the jumper and the feeder to 25 Nm to 35 Nm (221.25 lbfin. to
309.75 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 2-46.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-46 Connecting the jumper and the feeder

(1) Feeder

(2) Jumper

----End

2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H cabinet
after you restructure the APM30H.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context
Table 2-7 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 2-7 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the APM30H

EPC4
connector

LOAD2 port
on the EPU

3V3
connector

PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the APM30H

A 1.1 m (3.61
ft) cable is
newly
delivered.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Connector
at One End

Input power
cable for the
junction box

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

OT terminals M4 ground
(M4)
screw as
well as L1,
and N1
terminals
near the AC
OUTPUT
silkscreen on
the EPU in
the
APM30H

OT terminals

L and N
terminals in
the junction
box

To be reused

EMUA
power cable

EPC4
connector

LOAD5 port
on the EPU

Cord end
terminals

PWR1 port
on the
EMUA

To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.

BBU power
cable

EPC4
connector

LOAD0 or
LOAD6 port
on the EPU

3V3
connector

-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU

A cable is
newly
delivered.

Table 2-8 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.


Table 2-8 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installation
Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
in the
APM30H

2-pin
connector

GATE port
on the PMU

Bare wire

Door status
sensor

To be reused

ELU signal
cable

RJ45
connector

ELU

RJ45
connector

ELU port in
the CMUEA

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
for the fan in
the front
door

Interconnect
ion terminal

Power cable
for the fan in
the front door
of the
APM30H

4-pin
connector

FAN_EXT
port on the
fan assembly

A cable is
newly
delivered.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installation
Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA

RJ45
connector

MON1 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU

A 1.1 m
(3.61 ft)
cable is
newly
delivered.

Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
PMU

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the fan
assembly of
the APM30H

A 1.1 m
(3.61 ft)
cable is
newly
delivered.

EMUA
monitoring
signal cable

DB9 male
connector

RS-485 port
on the
EMUA

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
PMU

To be reused

Procedure
l

Remove related cables in the cabinet.


Remove the related cables listed in Table 2-7 and Table 2-8. If the cables have been
removed during the module replacement, skip this step.

Install power cables in the APM30H.


1.

2.

3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the APM30H, as shown by P1 in Figure
2-47.
a.

Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD2 port on the panel of the EPU.

b.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD2 port
on the EPU.

c.

Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque wrench to tighten the screws
on the 3V3 connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).

Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-47.


a.

Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For detailed operations, see
Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the
EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b.

Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD5 port on the panel of the EPU.

c.

Connect the one end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD5
port on the EPU.

d.

Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 port
on the EMUA.

Install input power cable for the junction box, as shown by P3 in Figure 2-47.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4.

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

a.

Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L1 and N1
terminals near the AC OUTPUT silkscreen on the EPU, and tighten the terminals
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

b.

Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L and
N terminals in the junction box, and tighten the terminals to 1.2 Nm (10.62
lbfin.).

Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P4 in Figure 2-47.


a.

Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the
instructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4
connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

b.

Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD0 or LOAD1 port on the panel of
the EPU.

c.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD0 or
LOAD1 port on the EPU.

d.

Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on the
UPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54
lbfin.).

Figure 2-47 Installing power cables in the APM30H

5.

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind the cable.

6.

Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

Install signal cables in the APM30H.


1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-48.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

a.

Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on the
top of the ELU.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU port
on the fan assembly.

Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure
2-48.
a.

Connect one end of the signal cable to the GATE port on the PMU.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable to the door status sensor.

Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door, as shown by S3 in
Figure 2-48.
a.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door to
its transfer terminal.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable with a 4-pin connector to the FAN_EXT
port on the fan assembly.

Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S4 in Figure 2-48.


a.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the
COM_IN port on the CMUEA.

b.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to
the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

Install the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 2-48.


a.

Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUT
port on the CMUEA.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_IN
port on the PMU.

Optional: Install the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, as shown by S6 in Figure
2-48.
a.

Connect the end of the signal cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS485 port
on the EMUA, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).

b.

Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUT
port on the PMU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-48 Installing signal cables in the APM30H

7.

Optional: Install the surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals.
a.

Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of the
SLPU.

b.

Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in the
BBU.

c.

Connect the other three surge protection transfer cables, as shown in Figure
2-49.

Figure 2-49 Connections of surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals

8.

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind the cable.

9.

Label the installed cables according to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

2.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11H
cabinet to be restructured.

2.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the


TMC11H Cabinet
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and added
during the restructuring of the TMC11H cabinet.

Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Components in the TMC11H


Cabinet
There are two types of TMC11Hs:
l

One type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in


Figure 2-50.

The other type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as
shown in illustration B in Figure 2-50.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-50 Exterior and configurations of the TMC11H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Remarks

Fan
assembly

To be
replace
d

The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance the


heat dissipation capacity.

SLPU

To be
reused

ELU

To be
replace
d

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needs


to be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.

DCDU-03
C

To be
replace
d

It needs to be replaced with the DCDU-12B or


DCDU-12C.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Remarks

BBU3900

To be
reused

Door status
sensor

To be
reused

Environme
nt
monitoring
unit type A
(EMUA)

To be
reused

AC heater

To be
reused

Front door

To be
replace
d

The heat exchanger in the cabinet needs to be replaced


to enhance the heat dissipation capacity of the cabinet.

10

Junction
box

To be
reused

11

DCDU-11
B, or
DCDU-11
C

To be
replace
d

It needs to be replaced with the DCDU-12B or


DCDU-12C.

Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Cables in the TMC11H


Cabinet
Figure 2-51 shows the power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses
the BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power.
Figure 2-51 Power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

P1

P2

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Power
cable for
the fan
assembly in
the
TMC11H

BBU power
cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installatio
n Position

Connecto
r

Installatio
n Position

l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD8
port on
the
DCDU03C.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD9
port on
the
DCDU12C.

l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
TMC11
H.

l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
TMC11
H.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD6
port on
the
DCDU03C.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
-48V
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.

l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD6
or
LOAD7
port on
the
DCDU11C.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

To be
replaced

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
-48V
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.

75

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

P3

P4

Cable

EMUA
power
cable

Equipotenti
al cable for
grounding
of the front
door

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installatio
n Position

Connecto
r

Installatio
n Position

l One end
is toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD7
port on
the
DCDU03C.

l One end
is toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD8
port on
the
DCDU11C.

l The
other
end is
cord
end
terminal
s.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.

l The
other
end is
cord
end
terminal
s.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.

Both ends
are OT
terminals.

l One end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the front
door.

Both ends
are OT
terminals.

l One end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the front
door.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of
the
cabinet.

Change
Type

They can be
used
continuousl
y and their
connectors
need to be
replaced
onsite.

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of
the
cabinet.

Figure 2-52 shows the signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses the BBU3900 and is
supplied with -48 V DC power.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-52 Signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet

No.

S1

Cable

Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the door
status
sensor

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

l One
end is a
2-pin
connec
tor.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GATE
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

l One
end is a
2-pin
connec
tor.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GATE
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

l The
other
end is
bare
wires.

l The
other
end is
bare
wires.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
door
status
sensor.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

To be
reused

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
door
status
sensor.

77

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S2

Cable

CMUABBU
monitorin
g signal
cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
IN port
on the
fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

Change
Type

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S3

Cable

ELU
signal
cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

To be
reused

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU.

79

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S4

Cable

Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the fan in
the front
door

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors
.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
FAN_
EXT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors
.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
FAN_
EXT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
transfe
r box in
the
front
door of
the
TMC1
1H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

To be
replaced

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
transfe
r box in
the
front
door of
the
TMC1
1H.

80

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S5

Cable

EMUA
monitorin
g signal
cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

l One
end is a
DB9
male
connec
tor.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
OUT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly.

l One
end is a
DB9
male
connec
tor.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
OUT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly.

l The
other is
an
RJ45
connec
tor.

l The
other is
an
RJ45
connec
tor.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
RS-48
5 port
on the
EMUA
.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

To be
reused

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
RS-48
5 port
on the
EMUA
.

81

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S6

Cable

Surge
protection
transfer
cable for
the
monitorin
g signals

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
EXT_
ALM0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
S7

GPS clock
signal
cable

l One
end is
an
SMA
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end is
an Ntype
female
connec
tor.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GPS
port on
the
USCU
in the
BBU.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to a
GPS
surge
protect
or.

Change
Type

To be
reused

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
EXT_
ALM0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
l One
end is
an
SMA
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end is
an Ntype
female
connec
tor.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GPS
port on
the
USCU
in the
BBU.

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connec
ts to a
GPS
surge
protect
or.
82

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S8

Cable

CMUEBBU
monitorin
g signal
cable

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
IN port
on the
fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

Change
Type

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.

2.7.2 Replacing the Front Door


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door. The front doors
of the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures for removing
the front doors of the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needlenose pliers.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn off the fan in the front door.
If...

Then...

An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
APM30H assembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
(Ver.B) is
used
A
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker controls
TMC11H power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
(Ver.B) is
used
An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
APM30H assembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
(Ver.C) is
used
A
Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breaker controls
TMC11H power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
(Ver.C) is
used
Step 3 Remove the front door to be replaced.
1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Remove the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door from the transfer box, as
shown in Figure 2-53.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-53 Removing the connector from the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the
front door

2.

Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown
in Figure 2-54.
Figure 2-54 Removing the equipotential cable for the door of the cabinet

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two hinges from the front door, and remove the
front door, as shown in Figure 2-55.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-55 Removing the front door

Step 4 Install the new front door.


NOTE

l When installing the front door, use new removable pins.


l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the front door before delivery.

1.

Install the new front door and insert the removable pins.

2.

Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on an inner wall.

Step 5 Replace an N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever.


1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Remove the two M4 screws on the left N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever
and pull out the door support lever from the right N-shaped fixing bracket. Then move the
left N-shaped fixing bracket to the right part of the door support lever and remove the left
N-shaped fixing bracket, as shown in the following figure.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-56 Remove an N-shaped fixing bracket

2.

Take out and slide a new N-shaped fixing bracket onto the right part of the door support
lever and move it to the left part of the lever. Use two M4 screws to secure the new Nshaped fixing bracket, with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), and place the right part of
the door support lever in its original position, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-57 Install a new N-shaped fixing bracket

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the number on
the barcode label starts from 212102, as shown by 1 in Figure 2-58.
If...

Then...

There is a barcode label in the indicated


position

Proceed with the next step.

There is no barcode label in the indicated


position

Record the barcode (shown by 2 in Figure


2-58) on the front door, and stick a barcode
label carrying the same barcode to the
indicated position.

Figure 2-58 Positions of the barcode labels

(1) Position of the barcode label on an inner wall of the (2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of the
cabinet
cabinet

Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.7.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
flat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 (Optional) Turn off the circuit breaker LOAD8 on the DCDU-03C. Skip this step if the fan
assembly has been powered off during replacement of the front door.
Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.
1.

Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fan
assembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as
shown in Figure 2-59.
NOTE

The procedure for removing a fan assembly from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H
(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) are the same. Figure 2-59 uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.

Figure 2-59 Removing the fan assembly

DANGER
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan
assembly.
Step 4 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 5 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position and tighten
the four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in
Figure 2-60. The recommended torque is 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
NOTE

When installing the new fan assembly, ensure that the air exhaust vent of the fan assembly is on the top.

Figure 2-60 Installing the new fan assembly

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.7.4 Replacing the ELU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit
(ELU).

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-61.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-61 Position of the ELU

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1.

Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.

2.

Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,
as shown in Figure 2-62.
Figure 2-62 Opening the housing of the ELU

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown in
Figure 2-63.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-63 Removing the ELU

Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.


Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE

l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure
2-64. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 2-9.

Figure 2-64 Position of the barcode label

(1) Barcode label on the ELU

(2) BOM code

Table 2-9 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed base


station

l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macro


base station

l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission


equipment

l Ver.B: 02113830

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 and


uses the -48 V DC power supply

l Ver.B: 02113827

l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195

l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393

l Ver.C: 02113398

l Ver.C: 02113395

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

RFC (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390
l Ver.B: 02113819

IBBS200D (Ver.B)

l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480


l Ver.B: 02113820

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

l Ver.C: 02113397

1.

Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. The
recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

2.

Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.

3.

Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.

Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic label
information of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplate
in the upgrade package.
l

If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.

If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.7.5 Replacing the DCDU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDUs in an TMC11H.
These DCDUs include the DCDU-03B, DCDU-03C, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-11C.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
The following table helps you determine whether a DCDU needs to be replaced with a
DCDU-12B or DCDU-12C.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cabinet

Base Station

Application
Scenarios

DCDU Model
Before
Replacement

DCDU Model
After
Replacement

TMC11H
(Ver.B)

DBS3900

It provides
transmission
space.

DCDU-03C

DCDU-12C

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cabinet

Base Station

BTS3900A

TMC11H
(Ver.C)

DBS3900

BTS3900A

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Application
Scenarios

DCDU Model
Before
Replacement

DCDU Model
After
Replacement

It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.

DCDU-03B

DCDU-12B

It provides
transmission
space.

DCDU-03C

DCDU-12C

It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.

DCDU-03C

DCDU-12C

It provides
transmission
space.

DCDU-11C

DCDU-12C

It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.

DCDU-11B

DCDU-12B

It provides
transmission
space.

DCDU-11C

DCDU-12C

It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.

DCDU-11C

DCDU-12C

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 2 Power off the DCDU according to the following table.


If...

Then...

A DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B needs to be


powered off

Switch off the external power supply.

A DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C in a TMC11H


Turn off the TMC circuit breaker on the
needs to be powered off, and the TMC11H only EPS in the APM30H.
provides transmission space
At a BTS3900A site, a DCDU-03C in a
TMC11H needs to be powered off, and the
TMC11H houses BBU3900 and is supplied
with -48 V DC power

Turn off the SPARE2 circuit breaker on the


DCDU-01 in the RFC.

A DCDU-11C in a TMC11H needs to be


Switch off the external power supply.
powered off, and the TMC11H houses
BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power
At a DBS3900 site, a DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C Switch off the external power supply.
in a TMC11H needs to be powered off, and the
TMC11H houses BBU3900 and is supplied
with -48 V DC power
Step 3 Remove the DCDU.
1.

Remove all cable connectors from the DCDU.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal
block from the DCDU, as shown in Figure 2-65.

3.

Record the connection of the input power cables, and then remove the power cables.

4.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from both sides of the DCDU, and
pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as shown in Figure 2-66.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-65 Removing the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block from the
DCDU

Figure 2-66 Removing the DCDU

Step 4 Place the removed DCDU and protective covers in an ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install a new DCDU-12B.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

1.

Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.

2.

Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H cabinet
after restructuring the TMC11H cabinet.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context
Table 2-10 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 2-10 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Descriptio
n

Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the TMC11H

EPC4
connector

LOAD9 port
on the
DCDU-12C

3V3
connector

PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the TMC11H

The cable is
newly
delivered.

BBU power
cable

EPC4
connector

LOAD6 or
LOAD7 port
on the
DCDU-12C
in the
TMC11H

3V3
connector

-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU of
the TMC11H

The cable is
newly
delivered.

EMUA
power cable

EPC4
connector

LOAD8 port
on the
DCDU-12C

Cord end
terminals

PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA

To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.

Table 2-11 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 2-11 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet


Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Descriptio
n

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor

Bare wire

GATE port
on the fan
assembly

Bare wire

Door status
sensor

Reused

CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU

The cable is
newly
delivered. It
is 1.1 m (3.61
ft) long.

ELU signal
cable

RJ45
connector

ELU

RJ45
connector

ELU port on
the fan
assembly

Reused

Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable for the
fan in the
front door

Interconnecti
on terminal

Power cable
for the fan in
the front
door of the
TMC11H
cabinet

4-pin
connector

FAN_EXT
port on the
fan assembly

Newly
delivered
cable

EMUA
monitoring
signal cable

DB9 male
connector

RS485 port
on the
EMUA

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
fan assembly

Reused

Procedure
l

Install power cables in the TMC11H cabinet.


1.

2.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H cabinet, as shown by P1
in Figure 2-67.
a.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD9 port
on the DCDU-12C.

b.

Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54
lbfin.).

Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-67. If a BBU is
not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.
a.

Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the
instructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 or
LOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

c.

3.

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on the
UPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54
lbfin.).

Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 2-67.


a.

Replace the OT terminals at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4
connector, as described in Table 2-10. For details about how to replace the
terminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD8 port
on the DCDU-12C.

c.

Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 port
on the EMUA.

Figure 2-67 Installing power cables in the TMC11H cabinet

4.

Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use
cable ties to bind the cables.

5.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

Install signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet.


1.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to the GATE
port on the fan assembly, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-68.

2.

Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 in


Figure 2-68. If a BBU is not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.

3.

a.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the
COM_IN port on the CMUEA.

b.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to
the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S3 in Figure 2-68.


a.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on the
top of the ELU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

b.
4.

5.

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU port
on the fan assembly.

Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly in the front door, as shown by
S4 in Figure 2-68.
a.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door to
its transfer terminal.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable with a 4-pin connector to the FAN_EXT
port on the fan assembly.

Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 2-68.


a.

Connect the end of the signal cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS485 port
on the EMUA, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).

b.

Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUT
port on the CMUEA.

Figure 2-68 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet

6.

Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use
cable ties to bind the cables.

7.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

2.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet


This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFC
cabinet to be restructured.

2.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC


This section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Component Changes in the RFC


Figure 2-69 shows component changes in the RFC.
Figure 2-69 Components in the RFC

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

DCDU-01

To be
replace
d

The DCDU-01 needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A to


enhance the power distribution capability.

ELU

To be
replace
d

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needs


to be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.

Door status
sensor

Reused

FAN 01A

To be
replace
d

The FAN 01A needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C to


enhance the heat dissipation capability.

RFU

To be
replace
d

The original RFUs are replaced by new RFUs with


enhanced capacities.

DCDU-11
A

To be
replace
d

The DCDU-11A needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A


to enhance the power distribution capability.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

FAN 01B

To be
replace
d

The FAN 01B needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C to


enhance the heat dissipation capability.

DC
Junction
Box

l The DC junction box in an RFC (Ver.B) uses one or


two DC power inputs and provides two DC power
outputs.
l The original DC junction box will be used in the RFC
(Ver.C).

Cable Changes in the RFC


Figure 2-70 shows the power cable changes in the RFC.
Figure 2-70 Power cables in the RFC

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
0

DCDU-1
1A
power
cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

RFC (Ver.B)

RFC (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals on the
DCDU-11A.

Cha
nge
Typ
e
Reu
sed

l The other end


connects to the
DC junction
box.
P
1

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Power
cable for
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC

l One end
is a
parallel
terminal.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l One end
connects
to the
FAN port
on the
DCDU-0
1.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).

l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects to the
LOAD6 port on
the
DCDU-11A.

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in the
RFC.

103

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
2
to
P
7

RFU
power
cables

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

RFC (Ver.B)

RFC (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

l One end
is a
parallel
terminal.

l One end
connects
to one of
the RFU0
to RFU5
ports on
the
DCDU-0
1.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connects to one
of the LOAD0
to LOAD5
ports on the
DCDU-11A in
the RFC.

l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l The other end


connects to the
PWR port on an
RRU among
RFU 0 to RFU
5.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.

l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on an
RRU
among
RFU 0 to
RFU 5.
P
8

Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.

Cha
nge
Typ
e
To
be
repl
aced

Reu
sed

l The other end


connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.

Figure 2-71 shows the signal cable changes in the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-71 Signal cable changes in the RFC

No.

S1

Cable

RFC (Ver.B)

Monitoring
Signal
Cable for
the Door
Status
Sensor

RFC (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are bare
wires.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.

Both ends
are bare
wires.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

105

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S2

Cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

RFC (Ver.B)

ELU signal
cable

RFC (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU.
S3

Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
RFC

l One end
is a 4-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is a
temperat
ure
sensor.

l One end
connects
to the
TEM
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.
l The
other
end is
bound
nearby
the air
intake
vent at
the
bottom
of the
RFC.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU.
l One end
is a 4-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is a
temperat
ure
sensor.

l One end
connects
to the
TEM
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

Reused

l The
other end
is bound
nearby
the air
intake
vent at
the
bottom
of the
RFC.

2.8.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The
procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C) is the same as the procedure for
replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Power off the fan assembly.
If...

Then...

An RFC (Ver.B) Turn off the FAN circuit breaker on the DCDU-01.
is used
An RFC (Ver.C) Turn off the SW6 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11A.
is used
Step 3 Remove the original fan assembly.
1.

Record all cable connections on the panel of the fan assembly.

2.

Remove all the cables from the front panel of the fan assembly.

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears on both sides
of the fan assembly, and pull the box out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as
shown in Figure 2-72.
NOTE

The procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B) is the same as the procedure for replacing
a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 2-72 uses an RFC (Ver.C) as an example.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-72 Removing the fan assembly

4.

Place the removed fan assembly into an ESD box or bag.

Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten
the four screws on the mounting ears on both sides to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.8.3 Replacing the ELU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit
(ELU).

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-73.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-73 Position of the ELU

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1.

Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.

2.

Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,
as shown in Figure 2-74.
Figure 2-74 Opening the housing of the ELU

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown in
Figure 2-75.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-75 Removing the ELU

Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.


Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE

l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure
2-76. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 2-12.

Figure 2-76 Position of the barcode label

(1) Barcode label on the ELU

(2) BOM code

Table 2-12 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed base


station

l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macro


base station

l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission


equipment

l Ver.B: 02113830

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 and


uses the -48 V DC power supply

l Ver.B: 02113827

l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195

l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393

l Ver.C: 02113398

l Ver.C: 02113395

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

RFC (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390

IBBS200D (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397

1.

Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. The
recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

2.

Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.

3.

Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.

Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic label
information of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplate
in the upgrade package.
l

If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.

If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.8.4 Replacing the DCDU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-01 or DCDU-11A
in an RFC.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
As shown by Figure 2-77, a DCDU-01 is located in the top 1 U space of an RFC (Ver.B). The
DCDU-11A in an RFC (Ver.C) is in the same position as the DCDU-01.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-77 Position of the DCDU-01

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD
gloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 2 Switch off all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU to power off the fan assembly and RFUs.
Step 3 Power off the DCDU.
If...

Then...

An RFC (Ver.B) Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPS.
is installed in an
AC power
supply scenario
An RFC (Ver.B) Switch off the external power supply.
is installed in a
DC power
supply scenario
An RFC (Ver.C) Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPU.
is installed in an
AC power
supply scenario

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

If...

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Then...

An RFC (Ver.C) Switch off the external power supply.


is installed in a
DC power
supply scenario
Step 4 Remove the old DCDU.
1.

Record the positions of all connectors on the DCDU, and remove the connectors.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal
block from the DCDU, as shown in Figure 2-78.

3.

Record the connection of the input power cables, and then remove the power cables.

4.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from both sides of the DCDU, and
pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as shown in Figure 2-79.
NOTE

The procedure for removing a DCDU-01 is the same as that for removing a DCDU-11A. Figure 2-78 and Figure
2-79 use a DCDU-11A as an example.

Figure 2-78 Removing the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block from the
DCDU

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-79 Removing the DCDU

Step 5 Place the removed DCDU and protective covers in an ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Install a new DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 2-81.
1.

Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 2-80.
Figure 2-80 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A

(1) Double-sided tape

2.

Place the new DCDU-12A on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the
DCDU-12A into the cabinet.

3.

Tighten the two screws on each side of the DCDU-12A to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-81 Installing the DCDU-12A

(1) DCDU-12A

(2) Cable claw

Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.8.5 Replacing the RFU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or a pair
of ESD gloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.

Context
l

RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, and LRFU.

If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking
for TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.

Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.

Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.

The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. When
DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced. For details about
how to remove the GATM and Bias-Tee, see 2.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and
Bias-Tee.

A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of the
document holder on the cabinet door, as shown in Figure 2-82.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-82 Position of the handle

NOTE

The handle is only for pulling an RFU outwards horizontally.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTE

Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to prevent
electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.

Step 2 Remove the RFU to be replaced.


1.

Turn off the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to power off the
RFU.

2.

Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.

3.

Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector
on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.

4.

Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the fiber.

5.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then
pull the RFU handle to move the RFU outwards 50 mm (1.97 in.) to 100 mm (3.94 in.), as
shown in Figure 2-83. Hold the RFU with one hand, and remove the RFU from the cabinet
with the other hand.

CAUTION
The RFU is heavy. Therefore, handle it with caution.
6.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Place the handle in its original position.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-83 Removing the RFU

Step 3 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC, as shown in
Figure 2-84. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is
used, skip this step.
1.

Strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton padding, and adhere the windproof cotton
padding to the position of "1" in Figure 2-84.

2.

Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the
RFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure
2-84, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.

3.

Strip all pieces of windproof cotton padding left on the cabinet wall after removing the
windproof cotton padding.

Figure 2-84 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC

(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom right
side of the RFC

Step 4 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC, as shown in Figure
2-85. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is used, skip
this step.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

1.

Strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton padding, and adhere the windproof cotton
padding to the position of "1" in Figure 2-85.

2.

Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom left side of the
RFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure
2-85, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.

3.

Strip all pieces of windproof cotton padding left on the cabinet wall after removing the
windproof cotton padding.
Figure 2-85 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC

(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom
left side of the RFC

Step 5 Install the new RFU.


1.

Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.

2.

Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners of the RFU panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.) to
secure the RFU to the subrack.

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box


The DC junction box in an RFC converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.
Skip this section if an RFC (Ver.C) is used, which has already been configured with a DC junction
box.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DCDU-12A,
which then distributes DC power to the RFC, the DC junction box is not configured.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box,
which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the DC junction box, as shown in Figure 2-86.
1.

Remove the screw from the protective cover for the DC junction box and then remove
protective cover.

2.

Remove the two screws from the DC junction box and then remove the DC junction box.
Figure 2-86 Removing the DC junction box

Step 3 Install the DC junction box in the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-87.
1.

Remove the two M6 screws from the left wall of the RFC.

2.

Align the two holes on the right side of the installation plate with the two holes left in Step
3.1, and secure them with the two removed M6 screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

3.

Place the DC junction box on the installation plate, and secure them with two M4 screws
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-87 Installing the DC junction box

NOTE

It is recommended that the protective cover be reinstalled after all required cables are connected to the DC
junction box.

----End

2.8.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC cabinet
after you restructure the RFC.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context
Table 2-13 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-13 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Descriptio
n

Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the RFC

EPC4
connector

LOAD6 port
on the
DCDU-12A

3V3
connector

PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the RFC

The cable is
newly
delivered. It
is 1.1 m (3.61
ft) long.

Input power
cable from
the DC
junction box
to the
DCDU-12A
in the RFC

OT terminal
(M6)

DC junction
box in the
RFC

OT terminals DCDU-12A
in the RFC

l A 0.3 m
(0.98 ft)
cable
with a
blue wire
and a
black
wire is
newly
delivered
for an
RFC
(Ver.B).
l The
original
cable is
used in an
RFC
(Ver.C).
The
newly
delivered
cable can
be
disposed
of.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Descriptio
n

RFU power
cables

EPC4
connector

One of
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
ports on the
DCDU-12A

3V3
connector

PWR port on
one of RFU 0
to RFU 5

Six RFU
power cables
are newly
delivered.
Power cables
for RFU 0 to
RFU 2 are
1.5 m (4.92
ft) and power
cables for
RFU 3 to
RFU 5 are
1.1 m (3.61
ft).

Table 2-14 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.


Table 2-14 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Descriptio
n

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor

Bare wire

GATE port
on the fan
assembly

Bare wire

Door status
sensor

Reused

ELU signal
cable

RJ45
connector

ELU port on
the fan
assembly

RJ45
connector

ELU

Reused

Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
RFC

4-pin
connector

TEM port on
the fan
assembly in
the RFC

Temperature
sensor

Air intake
vent at the
bottom of an
RFC

Reused

Procedure
l

Install power cables in the RFC.


1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the RFC, as shown by P1 in Figure
2-88.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2.

3.

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

a.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 port
on the DCDU-12A.

b.

Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54
lbfin.).

Optional: Install the input power cable for the RFC (from the DC junction box to the
DCDU-12A), as shown by P2 in Figure 2-88. If the cabinet is an RFC (Ver.B) in an
AC power supply scenario, skip this step.
a.

Optional: Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+)
and NEG(-) terminals in the DC junction box on an inner wall of the RFC, and
tighten the terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.). In an RFC (Ver.C), one end of
the power cable has been connected to the DC junction box. Therefore, skip this
step for an RFC (Ver.C).

b.

Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN+ and
NEG- terminals on the DCDU-12A, and tighten the terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).

Install the RFU power cables, as shown by P3 to P8 in Figure 2-88.


a.

Connect the end of the power cables with an EPC4 connector to one of the
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12A.

b.

Connect the end of the power cables with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the corresponding RFU, and tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.4 Nm
(3.54 lbfin.).

Figure 2-88 Installing power cables in the RFC

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

4.

Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use
cable ties to bind the cables.

5.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

Install signal cables in the RFC.


1.

Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-89.


a.

Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on the
top of the ELU.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU port
on the fan assembly in the RFC.

2.

Connect one end of the door status monitoring signal cable with bare wires to the
GATE port on the fan assembly, as shown by S2 in Figure 2-89.

3.

Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the RFC, as shown
by S3 in Figure 2-89.
a.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the temperature sensor near
the air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.

b.

Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable to
the TEM port on the fan assembly in the RFC.

Figure 2-89 Installing signal cables in the RFC

4.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use
cable ties to bind the cables.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

5.

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

2.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.

2.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the


IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
This section describes the changes to be made on the components and cables in an IBBS200D
or IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.

Component Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet


The component changes in the IBBS200D cabinet are the same as those in the IBBS200T cabinet.
This section uses the IBBS200D as an example. Figure 2-90 shows component changes in the
IBBS200D cabinet.
Figure 2-90 Components in the IBBS200D cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

ELU

To be
replace
d

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needs


to be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.

Storage
battery

Reused

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

Door status
sensor

Reused

Power
distribution
box

To be
replace
d

The power distribution box needs to be replaced to


enhance the power backup capacity.

Junction
terminal for
the input
power
cable of the
heating
film

Reused

Battery
temperatur
e sensor

Reused

Cable Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet


Figure 2-91 shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the IBBS200T.
Figure 2-91 Equipotential cable and power cables in the battery cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

P
1

P
2

Cable

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T


(Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

Power
transfer
cable for
the fan or
TEC in
the front
door

l One end
is a 3V3
connector
.

l One end
connects
to the
CMUA.

l One end
is a 3V3
connector
.

l One end
connects to the
PWR port on
the CMUE.

l The other
end is an
OT
terminal.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.

l The other
end is an
OT
terminal.

l The other end


connects to the
power
distribution
box.

RTN(+)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.

NEG(-)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

To
be
repl
aced

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
power
distribution
box.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
3

Cha
nge
Typ
e

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
power
distribution
box.

127

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

P
4

Cable

RTN(+)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries

IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T


(Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.

NEG(-)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
power
distribution
box.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
6

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
power
distribution
box.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
5

Cha
nge
Typ
e

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.
l The other end
connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.

To
be
reus
ed
(repl
ace
men
t of
the
term
inals
not
requ
ired)

128

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-92 shows signal cable changes in the cabinet.


Figure 2-92 Signal cable changes in the battery cabinet

No.

S1

Cable

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status
sensor

IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or
IBBS200T (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are bare
wires.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RF
cabinet
(RFC).

Both ends
are bare
wires.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

129

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S2

Cable

ELU signal
cable

IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or
IBBS200T (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU.

2.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power distribution box
in the battery cabinet.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

DANGER
When replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive and
negative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to prevent
the batteries from burning and to ensure personal safety.

Context
Before replacing the power distribution box, remove all storage batteries from the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Power off the battery cabinet.
If...

Then...

An IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T


(Ver.B) is used

1. Remove the tool-less female connector


(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on the
EPS.
2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker on
the EPS.
3. Turn off the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1
circuit breakers on the power distribution
box.
4. Turn off the BAT circuit breaker on the EPS.

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) 1. Remove the tool-less female connector


(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on the
EPU.
2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker on
the EPU.
3. Turn off the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1
circuit breakers on the power distribution
box.
4. Turn off the FAN/TEC_SW2 circuit breaker
on the power distribution box.
Step 3 Remove the storage batteries.
1.

Remove the terminal covers from the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 2-93.
Figure 2-93 Removing the terminal covers from the storage batteries

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2.

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Use temporary labels to mark the input power cables for the positive and negative poles on
the storage batteries and the serial connection copper bars between the storage batteries,
and remove the input power cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 2-94.
Figure 2-94 Removing the power cables for storage batteries

3.

Reinstall the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.

4.

Hold the slings on the storage batteries and pull the storage batteries out. Then use both
hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries in
a safe position.
NOTE

l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing the
baffle plate at one layer, you must remove all storage batteries at this layer before removing the
baffle plate at the lower layer.
l Use both hands to hold each storage battery to avoid falling.
l When placing the storage batteries outdoors, do not expose them to the sunlight.

Step 4 Remove the storage battery power cables and power transfer cable for the TEC or fan in the
front door from the power distribution box.
Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 2-95.
1.

Remove the two screws from the left cover plate of the power distribution box and remove
the cover plate.

2.

Remove the four screws from the interior of the power distribution box.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-95 Removing the power distribution box

3.

Take the power distribution box out and use insulation tape to wrap the OT terminals on
the cables connected to the power distribution box.

4.

Place the power distribution box into an ESD box or bag.

Step 6 Install rubber protective caps onto the screws for the earthquake-proof support on the top of the
battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-96.
Figure 2-96 Installing rubber protective caps

(1) Screws for the earthquake-proof support

(2) Rubber protective caps

Step 7 Install cables in the power distribution box.


Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

1.

Remove the cover plate from the new power distribution box.

2.

Install cables in the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 2-97.


Figure 2-97 Installing cables in the power distribution box

(1) NEG(-) cable for the (2) RTN(+) cable for the (3) NEG(-) cable for the (4) RTN(+) cable for the
upper storage batteries upper storage batteries lower storage batteries lower storage batteries
NOTE

The power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the battery cabinet has been connected
to the new power distribution box before delivery.

Step 8 Install the power distribution box in the battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-98.
1.

Place the new power distribution box in the battery cabinet.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four M4x8 screws in the power distribution box
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

3.

Install the cover plate on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two
M3x6 screws on the cover plate to 0.55 Nm (4.87 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-98 Installing the power distribution box

----End

2.9.3 Replacing the ELU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit
(ELU).

Prerequisites
l

The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves,
a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
There is an ELU on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet, as shown in
Figure 2-99.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-99 Position of the ELU in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1.

Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.

2.

Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,
as shown in Figure 2-100.
Figure 2-100 Opening the housing of the ELU

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown in
Figure 2-101.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-101 Removing the ELU

Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.


Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE

l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure
2-102. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 2-15.

Figure 2-102 Position of the barcode label

(1) Barcode label on the ELU

(2) BOM code

Table 2-15 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed base


station

l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macro


base station

l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission


equipment

l Ver.B: 02113830

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 and


uses the -48 V DC power supply

l Ver.B: 02113827

l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195

l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393

l Ver.C: 02113398

l Ver.C: 02113395

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

RFC (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390

IBBS200D (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397

1.

Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. The
recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

2.

Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.

3.

Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.

Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic label
information of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplate
in the upgrade package.
l

If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.

If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

2.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing storage batteries and cables
in the battery cabinet after you restructure the battery cabinet.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context
Table 2-16 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-16 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

Power
transfer
cable for the
TEC or fan in
the front
door

3V3
connector

PWR port on
the CMUEA

OT terminals Power
(M4, 2.5
Distribution
Box
mm2 or
2
0.004 in. )

Delivered
with the
power
distribution
box

RTN(+)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries

OT terminal

Storage
battery

OT terminal

Power
Distribution
Box

The cable is
newly
delivered.

NEG(-)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries

OT terminal

Storage
battery

OT terminal

Power
Distribution
Box

The cable is
newly
delivered.

RTN(+)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries

OT terminal

Storage
battery

OT terminal

Power
Distribution
Box

The cable is
newly
delivered.

NEG(-)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries

OT terminal

Storage
battery

OT terminal

Power
Distribution
Box

The cable is
newly
delivered.

Table 2-17 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.


Table 2-17 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

ELU signal
cable

RJ45
connector

ELU port in
the CMUEA

RJ45
connector

ELU

To be reused

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor

Bare wire

GATE port
on the
CMUEA

Bare wire

Door status
sensor

To be reused

Procedure
l

Install storage batteries and power cables in the battery cabinet.


1.

Install the power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the cabinet, as
shown by P1 in Figure 2-103.

2.

Place power cables for the storage batteries. The NEG(-) cables are black and RTN
(+) cables are red. P2 and P3 in Figure 2-103 show the routing of these power cables.
Figure 2-103 Installing copper bars and power cables in the battery cabinet

3.

Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in
Figure 2-104.
NOTE

The battery cell should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reserved
between battery cells.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-104 Installing the storage batteries

4.

Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 2-105.
a.

Remove terminal covers from the storage batteries.

b.

Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for series
connections.

c.

Install the NEG(-) cables and then RTN(+) cables for the storage batteries, and
tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).

Figure 2-105 Installing copper bars and power cables in the battery cabinet

5.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind the cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

6.
l

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

Install signal cables in the battery cabinet.


1.

2.

Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 2-106.


a.

Connect the ELU signal cable to the port on the ELU.

b.

Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU
port on the CMUEA.

Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure
2-106.
a.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.

b.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on the
CMUEA.

Figure 2-106 Installing signal cables in the battery cabinet

3.

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind the cable.

4.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

2.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables


This chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting the
modules to external devices.

2.10.1 Installing the BBU Case


This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in an
APM30H or TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and a torque screwdriver.

Context
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l

During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

When a second BBU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that the second BBU
be installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.

Figure 2-107 shows the position for installing the BBU case in the APM30H and TMC11H.
Figure 2-107 Position for installing the BBU case

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Remove the filler module from the position where the BBU case is to be installed, as
shown in Figure 2-108. If no filler module is installed in this position, skip this step.
1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting ear on each
side of the filler module.

2.

Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.


NOTE

Install removed filler modules in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top to bottom. Redundant
filler modules can be discarded.

Figure 2-108 Removing the filler module

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 2 Record the ESN on the BBU case and report it to the base station commissioning personnel. For
details, see Obtaining the ESN.
Step 3 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 2-109.
1.

Align the two cable claws with the holes on either side of the BBU case.

2.

Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

Figure 2-109 Installing cable claws on the BBU

Step 4 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 2-110.


1.

Place the BBU on the guide rails and slowly slide the BBU into the cabinet.

2.

Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ears on either side of the BBU to 2 Nm (17.70
lbfin.).

Figure 2-110 Installing the BBU case

Step 5 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-111.
1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructions
in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector
must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

2.

Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.

3.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the
EPU in the APM30H.

CAUTION
When installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connect
the BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the EPU. Operations in the reverse sequence
may cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
NOTE

Figure 2-111 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC11H, the
cable connections are the same.

Figure 2-111 Installing the BBU power cable in AC scenarios

Step 6 Install the BBU power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-112.
1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructions
in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector
must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

2.

Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.

3.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD8 port on the
DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.

CAUTION
When installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connect
the BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequence
may cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
NOTE

Figure 2-112 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU case is installed in an extension
TMC11H, the cable connections are the same.

Figure 2-112 Installing the BBU power cable in DC scenarios

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 7 Install inter-BBU signal cables. For details, see 2.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal
Cables.
Step 8 Install the transmission cables. For details, see 2.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables.
----End

2.10.2 Installing the BBU Components


This section describes how to install the boards into the BBU and SLPU.

Context
NOTE

This chapter only describes the procedure for installing components in the BBU. For details about the slots
where the BBU components are installed, see the BBU configuration information.

CAUTION
Take correct ESD prevention measures, such as wearing an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to
avoid static damage to boards, modules, and electronic components.

Operation Rules
l

When moving a board, hold the board with both hands, as shown in Figure 2-113.
Figure 2-113 Incorrect and correct operations for moving a board

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

When installing a board, hold the front panel with one hand and support the edge of the
board with the other hand to insert it into the slot. Do not use only one hand to hold the
board or apply pressure to the edge of the board. Figure 2-114 shows correct and incorrect
operations.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-114 Incorrect and correct operations for supporting a board for installation

When inserting a board into a slot, keep the board on the same plane as the slot. Do not
bend the board or insert it at an angle. Figure 2-115 shows correct and incorrect operations.
Figure 2-115 Incorrect and correct operations for inserting a board

CAUTION
l Exercise cautions when holding and placing boards to avoid collision or scratches. Do not
stack or deform boards after they are unpacked.
l When inserting a board, ensure that it does not collide with the subrack and is properly
installed.

Installing the boards into the BBU


Figure 2-116 uses the WMPT and UPEU as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the
BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

1.

Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the filler
panels from the slots.

2.

If there are ejector levers on the panel, raise them.

3.

Gently slide the board into the slot.

4.

If there are ejector levers on the panel, close them.

5.

Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).

Figure 2-116 Installing the boards into the BBU

Installing the boards into the SLPU


Figure 2-117 uses the UELP as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the SLPU.
1.

Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the filler
panels from the slots.

2.

Gently slide the board into the slot.

3.

Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).

Figure 2-117 Installing the boards into the SLPU

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

2.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B


This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the DCDU-12B.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
When RFUs and RRUs are configured in the BTS3900A, a DCDU-12B must be installed in the
RFC to supply power to RRUs.
Figure 2-118 shows the position of the DCDU-12B in the RFC.
Figure 2-118 Position of the DCDU-12B

Table 2-18 lists the specifications of DCDU-12B power cables in AC and DC scenarios.
Table 2-18 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables
Cable

DCDU12B
input
power
cable
(in AC

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

RT
N
(+)

Col
or

CrossSectional
Area of
the Cable

One End

The Other End

Connec
tor

Installation
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Bla
ck

25 mm2 or
0.039 in2,
one group

OT
terminal
(M6)

RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals in
the INPUT
part of the
DCDU-12B in
the RFC

OT
terminal
(M6)

RFC2
terminal on
the EPU in
the
APM30H

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Col
or

scenari
os)

NE
G
(-)

Blu
e

DCDU12B
input
power
cable
(in DC
scenari
os)

RT
N
(+)

Bla
ck

NE
G
(-)

Blu
e

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

CrossSectional
Area of
the Cable

One End

The Other End

Connec
tor

Installation
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

l 35
mm2 or
0.054
in.2
(low
smoke
zero
halogen
), one
group

OT
terminal
(M6)

RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals in
the INPUT
part of the
DCDU-12B in
the RFC

Depending
on the
external
equipment

External
power
equipment

l 16
mm2 or
0.025
in2, two
groups

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B.
Step 2 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 2-119.
1.

Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on the DCDU-12B contact the columns.

2.

Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as
shown in Figure 2-119.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-119 Installing the DCDU-12B

(1) DCDU-12B

(2) Cable claw

Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-120. Skip this
step in DC scenarios.
1.

Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For details, see Assembling the OT
Terminal and the Power Cable.

2.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal RFC2
on the EPU in the APM30H.

3.

Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input wiring
terminals on the DCDU-12B. Then reinstall the protective cover.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-120 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in AC scenarios

Step 4 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 2-121.
1.

Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For how to add a connector to the power
cable on the DCDU-12B side, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The
type of the connector at the other end depends on the onsite conditions.

2.

Connect the connector at the other end of the power cable to external power equipment.

3.

Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input wiring
terminals on the DCDU-12B. Then reinstall the protective cover.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-121 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in DC scenarios

Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cables.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End

2.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets


This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinets
during the upgrade.

2.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.C)


This section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,
transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between cabinets during
the upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).

Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential Cables


Table 2-19 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cables, and equipotential cables.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 2-19 Changes of power cables, PGND cables, and Equipotential cables
Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Input
power
cable
for the
APM3
0H (in
AC
scenar
ios)

To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

OT
termin
al
(M6)

AC
INPU
T port
on the
EPU

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment

Exter
nal
power
equip
ment

OT
termin
al
(M6)

AC
INPU
T port
on the
EPU

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment

Extern
al
power
equip
ment

Input
power
cable
for the
TMC1
1H (in
AC
scenar
ios)

To be
reuse
d, and
the
conne
ctor at
one
end
needs
to be
replac
ed
onsite
.

Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)

TMC
port on
the
EPU

OT
termin
al
(M6, 4
mm2
or
0.006
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-11
C

EPC4
connec
tor

LOAD
7 port
on the
EPU

OT
termin
al (M6,
4 mm2
or
0.006
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-12C

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Power
cable
for the
juncti
on box
in the
TMC1
1H

To be
reuse
d

OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L3 and
N3
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
APM3
0H

OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L and
N
termi
nals
near
the
AC
OUT
PUT
part
on the
juncti
on
box in
the
TMC
11H

OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L3 and
N3
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
APM3
0H

OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L and
N
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
TMC1
1H

Input
power
cable
for the
TMC1
1H
(when
the
TMC1
1H
uses
DC
power
suppli
ed by
the
RFC
cabine
t)

To be
replac
ed

OT
termin
al
(M6,
25
mm2
or
0.039
in.2)

Juncti
on box
in the
RFC

OT
termin
al
(M6,
25
mm2
or
0.039
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-11
C

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Juncti
on box
in the
RFC

OT
termin
al (M6,
25
mm2
or
0.039
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-12C

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in DC
scenar
ios)

To be
replac
ed

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Juncti
on
box in
the
RFC

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Juncti
on box
in the
RFC

Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in AC
scenar
ios)

To be
replac
ed

Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(blue)

Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(blue)
on the
EPU

OT
termin
al

Juncti
on
box in
the
RFC

OT
termin
al
(M6)

RFC1
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H

OT
termin
al

Juncti
on box
in the
RFC

RRU
power
cable

To be
reuse
d(1)

Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)

One of
LOAD
8 to
LOAD
13
ports
on the
EPU

Depen
ding
on the
RRU
port

EPC5
or
EPC4
connec
tor

One of
LOAD
0 to
LOAD
8 ports
on the
DCD
U-12B

Depen
ding
on the
RRU
port

PWR
port on
the
RRU

Input
power
cable
for the
heater
(in AC
scenar
ios)

To be
reuse
d

OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L1 and
N1
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
EPU

C13
connec
tor

Heate
r/
power
input
port

OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L1 and
N1
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
EPU

C13
connec
tor

Heater
/power
input
port

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Power
cables
for a
batter
y
cabine
t

To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(grey)

Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(grey)
on the
EPU

OT
termin
al
(M6,
16
mm2
or
0.025
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
on the
BAT
in the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200D
or
IBBS
200T

OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)

BAT
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H

OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als on
the
BAT
in the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T

Power
cables
for the
fan in
an
IBBS2
00D

To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)

LOAD
3 port
on the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H

OT
termin
al
(M4,
2.5
mm2
or
0.004
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
on the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200D

EPC4
connec
tor

LOAD
8 port
on the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H

EPC4
connec
tor

FAN/
TEC_I
NPUT
port on
the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00D

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Power
cable
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS2
00D

To be
reuse
d

OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L1 and
N1
termin
als or
L2 and
N2
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box

OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L and
N
termi
nals
on the
juncti
on
box
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS
200D

OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)

L1 and
N1
termin
als or
L2 and
N2
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box

OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L and
N
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS2
00D

Power
cable
for the
TEC
in the
IBBS2
00T

To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)

LOAD
3 port
on the
EPU

OT
termin
al
(M4,
2.5
mm2
or
0.004
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
FAN
silksc
reen
on the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200T

EPC4
connec
tor

LOAD
8 port
on the
EPU

EPC4
connec
tor

FAN/
TEC_I
NPUT
port on
the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00T

Equip
otentia
l cable

To be
reuse
d

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabin
et

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabine
t

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

PGND
cable

Chan
ge
Type

To be
reuse
d

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
for the
cabine
t

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d
busba
r
outsid
e the
cabin
et

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
for the
cabine
t

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d
busbar
outsid
e the
cabine
t

NOTE

(1) The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length requirements
of the new RRU.

Signal Cables
Table 2-20 lists the signal cable changes.
Table 2-20 Signal cable changes
Cable

Monitor
ing
signal
cable
between
cascade
d
CMUE
As

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

To
be
reus
ed

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
OUT
port on
the
upperlevel
CMU
A

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
IN
port on
the
lowerlevel
CMU
A

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
OUT
port on
the
upperlevel
CMU
EA

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
IN
port on
the
lowerlevel
CMU
EA

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Monitor
ing
signal
cable
for a
battery
cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

To
be
reus
ed

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
IN
port on
the
CMU
A in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
485
port on
the
PMU

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
IN
port on
the
CMU
EA in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
485
port on
the
PMU

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

CMUA
-BBU
monitor
ing
signal
cable

Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

To
be
reus
ed

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Before the Change


Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

RJ45
conne
ctor

l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UA
in
the
RF
C

RJ45
conne
ctor

l M
ON
0
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H

RJ45
conne
ctor

l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UE
A
in
the
RF
C

RJ45
conne
ctor

l M
ON
0
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
RF
C

l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UA
in
the
AP
M3
0H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

After the Change

l M
ON
1
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UE
A
in
the
AP
M3
0H

l M
ON
1
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H

162

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

BBU
intercon
nection
cable

Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

To
be
reus
ed

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

DLC
conne
ctor

One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU

DLC
conne
ctor

l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U

DLC
conne
ctor

One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU

DLC
conne
ctor

l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U

l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U

BBU
alarm
cable

To
be
reus
ed

RJ45
conne
ctor

EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU

RJ45
conne
ctor

Extern
al
alarm
device

RJ45
conne
ctor

EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU

RJ45
conne
ctor

Extern
al
alarm
device

Cable
between
two
combin
ed base
stations

To
be
reus
ed

DB15
male
conne
ctor

GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU

MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor

DGLU
b on
the
DCTB

DB15
male
conne
ctor

GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU

MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor

DGLU
b on
the
DCTB

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Externa
l dry
contact
monitor
ing
signal
cable

To
be
reus
ed

Bare
wire

SLPU

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment

Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment

Bare
wire

SLPU

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment

Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment

Adapter
used for
local
mainten
ance

To
be
reus
ed

USB
3.0
conne
ctor

USB
port on
the
UMPT
in the
BBU

Ethern
et
conne
ctor

Ethern
et
cable

USB
3.0
conne
ctor

USB
port on
the
UMPT
in the
BBU

Ethern
et
conne
ctor

Ethern
et
cable

Transmission Cables and CPRI Electrical Cables


Table 2-21 lists the changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables.
Table 2-21 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Chang
e Type

Connector at
One End

Installation
Position

Connector at
the Other End

Installation
Position

E1/T1
cable

To be
reused

DB26 male
connector

OUTSIDE port
on the UELP in
the SLPU

Depending on
the external
transmission
equipment

External
transmission
equipment

FE/GE
Etherne
t cables

To be
reused

RJ45 connector FE electrical


port in the
OUTSIDE part
on the UFLP in
the SLPU

RJ45 connector

Router that is
connected to
the BSC

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Cable

Chang
e Type

Connector at
One End

Installation
Position

Connector at
the Other End

Installation
Position

FE/GE
fiber
optic
cable

To be
reused

LC connector

l FE optical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT,
UMPT, or
UTRP in
the BBU

l FC
connector

Router that is
connected to
the BSC

l SC
connector
l LC
connector

l FE optical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
E1/T1
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable

To be
reused

DB25
connector

INSIDE port
on the UELP in
the SLPU

FE/GE
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable

To be
reused

RJ45 connector l FE
electrical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UMPT in
the BBU

DB26
connector

E1/T1 port on
the GTMU,
WMPT,
UMPT, or
UTRP in the
BBU

RJ45 connector

FE electrical
port in the
INSIDE part on
the UFLP in the
SLPU

LC connector

FE optical port
on the WMPT/
UMPT, LMPT/
UMPT, or
GTMU in the
BBU

l FE
electrical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
optical
ports

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

To be
reused

LC connector

FE optical port
on the GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Cable

Chang
e Type

Connector at
One End

Installation
Position

Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
electric
al ports

To be
reused

RJ45 connector FE electrical


port on the
GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU

CPRI
electric
al
cables

To be
reused

SFP20 male
connector

l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
GTMU in
the BBU

Connector at
the Other End

Installation
Position

RJ45 connector

FE electrical
port on the
WMPT/UMPT,
LMPT/UMPT,
or GTMU in the
BBU

SFP20 male
connector

l CPRI0 or
CPRI1 port
on one of
MRFU 0 to
MRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
GRFU 0 to
GRFU 5

l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5 (or
CPRI0 to
CPRI2)
ports on the
WBBP in
the BBU

l CPRI0 port
on one of
WRFU 0 to
WRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
LRFU 0 to
LRFU 5

l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
LBBP in the
BBU

RF Cables
Table 2-22 lists the RF cable changes.
Table 2-22 RF cable changes

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Change
Type

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

RF jumper

To be reused

DIN straight
male
connector

Antenna
feeder

DIN elbow
male
connector

ANT_TX/
RXA and
ANT_RXB
ports on the
RFU

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Cable

Change
Type

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Inter-RFU
RF signal
cable

To be reused

QMA elbow
male
connector

RX_OUTA
port on the
RFU

QMA elbow
male
connector

RX_INB
port on an
RFU

2.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for various
cabinets when AC power is supplied.

Installing Input Power Cable for the APM30H


The input power cable for the APM30H connects the external power equipment to the input
wiring terminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the cabinets in the BTS3900A.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.


Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
The cabinets used by the BTS3900A in AC scenarios support the power supplies of 220 V AC
three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. Table 2-23 lists the input
power cables that are delivered for the APM30H supplied with different type of power.
Table 2-23 Specifications of input power cables for the APM30H
Cable
Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
220 V AC threephase power
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

L1
wire

Color

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

Brown

OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

l Prepared
onsite

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Black cable
with dual
insulation

167

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Color

One End

The Other
End

L2
wire

Black

OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

L3
wire

Gray

OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

N
wire

Blue

OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
220 V AC
single-phase
power

L wire

Brown

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

N
wire

Blue

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
110 V AC duallive-wire power

L1
wire

Black

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

L2
wire

Red

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

N
wire

White

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

Remarks
layers and
four core
wires

l Prepared
onsite
l Two wires (L
and N), each
with a single
core and two
insulation
layers
l Prepared
onsite
l Three wires
(L1, L2, and
N), each with
a single core
and two
insulation
layers

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the APM30H.
1.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add an OT terminal to each end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling
the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 2-122, Figure 2-123, or
Figure 2-124.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover for the AC
input terminals, and open the protective cover.

2.

Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting bar
from the L1, L2, and L3 terminals.
NOTE

When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110 V AC
dual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.

3.

Route the power cable into the cabinet along the left side, connect each wire to the
corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).

4.

Reinstall the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screw on the protective
cover to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).

Figure 2-122 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC
three-phase)

(1) Short-circuiting bar

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-123 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC
single-phase)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-124 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (110 V AC
dual-live-wire)

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H


The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H include the input power cable for the
TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed power
from the APM30H into the TMC11H and other equipment. You need to reuse the power cables
from the APM30H to the TMC11H with replacing the connectors at both ends.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Context
l

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

Table 2-24 lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H.
Table 2-24 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H
Cable
Input power
cable for the
TMC11H

Power cable
for the
junction box
in the
TMC11H

Color

One End

The Other End

Remarks

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

EPC4 connector

OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

EPC4 connector

OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)

To be reused, and
the connectors at
both ends need to
be replaced.

L wire

Brow
n

OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)

OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)

N wire

Blue

OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)

OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the
TMC11H.
1.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add a connector to each end of the input power cable for the TMC11H and the power cable
for the junction box in the TMC11H according to the instructions in Table 1. For details,
see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector
and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-125.
1.

Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal
LOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminals
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4.

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Reinstall the protective cover onto the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.

Figure 2-125 Installing the input power cable for the TMC11H

Step 3 Install the power cable for the junction box of the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-126.
1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L3 and N3 terminals in the junction
box of the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the AC input terminals L and N in the junction
box of the TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-126 Installing power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H

Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the RFCs


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from the
APM30H to the RFCs.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Context
l

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

Table 2-25 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs.
Table 2-25 Power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs
Cable

Color

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)

OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)

A cable is newly
delivered.

OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)

OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)

A cable is newly
delivered.

Input power
cable for the
RFC
(between the
APM30H
and the RFC
right below
the
APM30H)

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Input power
cable for the
RFC
(between the
APM30H
and the RFC
on the lower
right side)

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Procedure
Step 1 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower side),
as shown in Figure 2-127.
1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC1 terminals on the EPU
in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the DC junction box in
the RFC on the lower side.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-127 Installing input power cables for the RFC

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower right
side), as shown in Figure 2-128.
1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cables to the RFC2 terminals on the EPU
in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cables to the DC junction box in
the RFC on the lower right side.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-128 Installing the input power cable for the RFC

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (One
IBBS200D or IBBS200T Configured)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from the
APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T when one IBBS200D or IBBS200T is configured in
the initial configuration.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.


Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l

A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Table 2-26 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 2-26 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T
Cable

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

Prepared onsite

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

Prepared onsite

OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)

OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)

Prepared onsite

OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.
2)

OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)

To be reused

Power cables
for the fan in
an
IBBS200D

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Power cable
for a battery
cabinet

RTN
(+)
wire

Red

NEG
(-)
wire

Black

L wire

Brow
n

N
wire

Blue

Power cable
for the
heating film
in the
IBBS200D

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Color

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the cable.
1.

Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be configured and
determine the cable to be prepared and installed according to Table 1.

2.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

3.

Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable
l Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable

Step 2 Install the power cable for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 2-129.
1.

Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen
on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box in the
lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Figure 2-129 Installing the power cable for the battery cabinet

Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 2-130.
NOTE

If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 on
the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.

Figure 2-130 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly in the IBBS200D

Step 4 Install the power cable for the heating film in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 2-131.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.

1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the junction
box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in the
junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-131 Installing the power cables for the heating films in the IBBS200Ds

NOTICE
When installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do not
connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 2-132.
l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.
l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from the
top, not from the bottom.

Figure 2-132 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of
the IBBS200Ds

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 5 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 2-133.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 on
the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.

Figure 2-133 Installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T

Step 6 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
NOTE

When routing cables along the right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cables
that are routed in front of the power distribution box. For easy maintenance in the future, do not bind the cables
that are routed in front of the power distribution box.

Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 8 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
(Two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts Configured)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from the
APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts when two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts are configured
in the initial configuration.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.


Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l

A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Table 2-27 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Table 2-27 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Color

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

Prepared onsite

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

The power cable


is reused with
connectors at
both end
replaced.

Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the
IBBS200D

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Cascading
power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the
IBBS200D

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Color

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

Prepared onsite

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

The power cable


is reused with
connectors at
both end
replaced.

OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)

OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)

Prepared onsite

OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)

OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)

Prepared onsite

OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.
2)

OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)

To be reused

Power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Cascading
power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Power cable
for batteries

RTN
(+)
wire

Red

NEG
(-)
wire

Black

Cascading
power cable
for the
batteries

RTN
(+)
wire

Red

NEG
(-)
wire

Black

Power cable
(two wires)
for the
heating film
in the
IBBS200D

L wire

Brow
n

N
wire

Blue

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the cable.
1.

Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be configured and
determine the cable to be prepared and installed according to Table 1.

2.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

3.

Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

l Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable


Step 2 Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P1 in Figure 2-134.
1.

Connect the OT terminal (M8) at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen
on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals near the BAT silkscreen in the lower part of the power distribution box in the
lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Step 3 Install cascading power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-134.
1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the upper part of the power distribution box in the
lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
wiring terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box
in the upper IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Figure 2-134 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the storage batteries

Step 4 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure 2-135.
NOTE

If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 on
the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen on the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

Step 5 Install the cascading power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure
2-135.
NOTE

If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.

Figure 2-135 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the fan in the
IBBS200D

Step 6 Install the power cable for the heating film in the upper IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure
2-136.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L1 and N1 terminals in the junction
box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in the
junction box on the inner left wall of the upper IBBS200D.

Step 7 Install the power cable for the heating film in the lower IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure
2-136.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.

1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the junction
box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in the
junction box on the inner left wall of the lower IBBS200D.

Figure 2-136 Installing the power cables for the heating films in the IBBS200Ds

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

NOTICE
When installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do not
connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 2-137.
l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.
l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from the
top, not from the bottom.

Figure 2-137 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of
the IBBS200Ds

Step 8 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P1 in Figure 5.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 on
the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the FAN/TEC port near the
INPUT silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

Step 9 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P2 in Figure 2-138.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-138 Installing the power cable and cascading power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T

Step 10 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
NOTE

When routing cables along the right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cables
that are routed in front of the power distribution box. For easy maintenance in the future, do not bind the cables
that are routed in front of the power distribution box.

Step 11 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 12 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

(Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable


When the BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRU.

The colors and structures of the power cables are for reference only, which may differ from
those of the cables onsite.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.


Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l

The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the
RRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installation
guide.

Table 2-28 lists the specifications of RRU power cables when a DCDU-12B supplies
power.
Table 2-28 Specifications of the RRU power cable
Cable
RRU
power
cable

Color

One End

The Other End

Remarks

RTN
(+)

Black

EPC5 or EPC4
connector

Depending on
the RRU port

NEG
(-)

Blue

l If the
original
RRU power
cable can be
reused, you
need to
replace the
connector on
the
DCDU-12B
side.
l If the
original
RRU power
cable must
be replaced,
you need to
add new
connectors
to both ends
of the new
RRU power
cable onsite.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Procedure
Step 1 Route the RRU power cable into the cabinet through the cable hole.
Step 2 Remove the ground clip in the cabinet, and put the removed ground clip into the ESD bag or
box.
Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 2-139.
1.

Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC to expose the shield layer.

2.

Strip the shield layer to expose the two core wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC.

3.

Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm
(10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 2-139 Installing the ground clip

4.

Install the PGND cables with the ground clips onto the two self-clinching studs on the right
wall of the RFC. Then tighten the self-clinching studs to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

Step 4 Add an EPC5 or EPC4 connector to the RRU power cable on the DCDU-12B side. For details
about how to add the connector, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable or
Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Stick a temporary label onto the RRU power cable to be installed.
Step 6 Connect the one end of the cable to the RRU.
Step 7 Connect the EPC5 or EPC4 connector on the RRU power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD8
ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 2-140.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

CAUTION
When installing the RRU power cable for an RRU that is added to a running base station, connect
the RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequence
may cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.

Figure 2-140 Installing the RRU power cable

Step 8 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailed
operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

2.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for various
cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Installing Input Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for the
RFC and TMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.


Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
As listed in Table 2-29, power cables for the RFC have two specifications: 35 mm2 (0.05 in.2)
and 16 mm2 (0.02 in.2).
Table 2-29 Input power cables for the RFC
Cable
Input power
cable for the
RFC

RTN
(+)
wire

(35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2, one
group)

NEG
Blue
(-) wire

Input power
cable for the
RFC

RTN
(+)
wire

(16 mm2 or
0.02 in.2, two
groups)

NEG
Blue
(-) wire

Input power
cable for the
TMC11H
(the
TMC11H is
powered by
the RFC)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Color

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

Black

Black

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

OT terminal (M6,
35 mm2 or 0.05 in.
2)

Depending on
the external
equipment

The power
cable is made
onsite.

OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)

The power
cable is made
onsite.

OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.02 in.
2)

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

NEG
Blue
(-) wire

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.
1.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add connectors to both ends of the input power cable for the RFC according to Table 1.
For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC, as shown in Figure 2-141.
1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals
in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the external power supply.

Figure 2-141 Installing the input power cable for the RFC

Step 3 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 2-142.
1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals
in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the input power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG
(-) terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-142 Installing the input power cable for the TMC11H

Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

(Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable


When the BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Context
l

The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the
RRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installation
guide.

Table 2-30 lists the specifications of the RRU power cable when a DCDU-12B supplies
power.
Table 2-30 Specifications of the RRU power cable
Cable
RRU
power
cable

Color

One End

The Other End

Remarks

RTN
(+)

Black

EPC5 or EPC4
connector

Depending on
the RRU port

NEG
(-)

Blue

l If the
original
RRU power
cable can be
reused, you
need to
replace the
connector on
the
DCDU-12B
side.
l If the
original
RRU power
cable must
be replaced,
you need to
add new
connectors
to both ends
of the new
RRU power
cable onsite.

NOTE

If the RRU is to be placed at a longer distance, replace the original RRU power cable with a longer
one.

Procedure
Step 1 Route an RRU power cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 2 Remove the ground clip in the cabinet, and put the removed ground clip into the ESD bag or
box.
Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 2-144.
1.

Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC to expose the shield layer.

2.

Strip the shield layer to expose the two core wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC.

3.

Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE

When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:
l When one to three RRU power cables are installed, put all the RRU power cables on one side of the
ground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in Figure 2-143.
l When four or six RRU power cables are installed, put two or three RRU power cables on each side of
the ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in Figure 2-143.
l When five RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread three cables
through one ground clip and two cables through the other group clip, or thread four cables through
one ground clip or one cable through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in Figure
2-143.
l When seven to ten RRU power cables or twelve RRU power cables are installed, use two ground clips
and comply with the preceding rules.
l When eleven RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread five
cables through one ground clip and six cables through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration
4 in Figure 2-143.

Figure 2-143 Installing the ground clips (side elevation view)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-144 Installing the ground clips

Step 4 Add an EPC5 or EPC4 connector to the RRU power cable on the DCDU-12B side. For details
about how to add the connector, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable or
Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Stick a temporary label onto the RRU power cable to be installed.
Step 6 Connect the one end of the cable to the RRU.
Step 7 Connect the EPC5 or EPC4 connector on the RRU power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD8
ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 2-145.

CAUTION
When installing the RRU power cable for an RRU that is added to a running base station, connect
the RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequence
may cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-145 Installing the RRU power cable

Step 8 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailed
operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

2.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables


This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing transmission cables between
a cabinet and the external transmission equipment.

Installing the E1/T1 Cable


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the E1/T1 cable.

Context
l

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the
E1/T1 cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in the APM30H
that is shown in Figure 2-146.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP, as shown in Figure
2-146.
NOTE

For the details about the cable connections,


l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station
Cables.

Figure 2-146 Installing the E1/T1 cable

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable outlet on the bottom left side of the
cabinet.
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 4 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cable


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.

Context
l

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.


l

An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.

When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the
FE/GE Ethernet cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in
the APM30H that is shown in Figure 2-148.

Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE cable in a proper position within 1 m from the cable outlet
of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-147.
1.

Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE cable, and strip the sheath off the cable
for about 40 mm to expose the shield layer.

2.

Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.

3.

Make the shield layer of the FE/GE cable in full contact with the ground clip, and tighten
the M4 screws on the clip until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 Nm.

Figure 2-147 Installing a grounding clip

Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) port
near the OUTSIDE label on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 2-148.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

NOTE

For the details about the cable connections,


l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station
Cables.

Figure 2-148 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable

Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet on
the bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 5 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing the FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable.

Context
l

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled
as MM.

The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multi-mode optical
module is black or gray.

The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.

An FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC
connector, or LC connector at the other end.

SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not
used simultaneously.

SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they are
not used simultaneously.

The method of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H is the same as the method
of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in a TMC11H. The following describes the procedure
for installing an FE/GE fiber optic cable in an APM30H.

NOTICE
An optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore,
you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes.

Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 2-149.
1.

Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the corresponding
BBU board.

2.

Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.

3.

Lower the puller on the optical module.

4.

Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.

5.

Raise the puller on the optical module.

Figure 2-149 Installing the optical module

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 2 Insert the optical module into the corresponding FE/GE optical port, as shown in Figure
2-150.
NOTE

For the details about the cable connections,


l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station
Cables.

Step 3 Stick a temporary label to the FE/GE fiber optic cable to be installed.
Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in Figure
2-150.
Figure 2-150 Installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable

Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet on
the bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 6 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 7 Replace the temporary label on the FE/GE fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For
detailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

2.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC


Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cables
between cabinets when AC power is supplied.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cable
between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 2-31 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable changes.

Table 2-31 Specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario
of 1 RFC+1 APM30H
Cable

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

Remarks

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 2-151.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-151 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 2-32 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cables between two
cabinets after the cable changes.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-32 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

To be reused

Battery
cabinet
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
and
APM30H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T

RJ45
connector

COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 2-152.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-152 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Install a battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T and
APM30H), as shown in Figure 2-153.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-153 Installing the battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T and APM30H)

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 2-33 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cables between two
cabinets after the cable changes.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-33 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 2-154.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-154 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),
as shown in Figure 2-155.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-155 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the TMC11H and RFC)

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 2-34 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-34 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T

RJ45
connector

COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 2-156.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-156 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T and
APM30H), as shown in Figure 2-157.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-157 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),
as shown in Figure 2-158.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-158 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the TMC11H and RFC)

Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 2-35 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 2-35 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installation
Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
upper
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
and lower
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the upper
IBBS200D

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
(between the
APM30H
and lower
battery
cabinet)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T

RJ45
connector

COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 2-159.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-159 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the upper IBBS200D/
IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in Figure 2-160.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the upper
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA on the door of
the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-160 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the
upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery cabinet and the
APM30H), as shown in Figure 2-161.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the lower
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-161 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery
cabinet and the APM30H)

Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 2-36 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 2-36 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
(between the
APM30H
and lower
battery
cabinet)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T

RJ45
connector

COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
upper
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
and lower
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the upper
IBBS200D

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 2-162.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
Figure 2-162 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the upper IBBS200D/
IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in Figure 2-163.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the upper
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA on the door of
the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-163 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery cabinet and the
APM30H), as shown in Figure 2-164.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the lower
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-164 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower
battery cabinet and the APM30H)

Step 4 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),
as shown in Figure 2-165.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-165 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the TMC11H and RFC)

Step 5 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

2.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48


V DC Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cables
between cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 2-37 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-37 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario
of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Cable

One End

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC11H)

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan
assembly in
the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU of the
TMC11H

Remarks

To be
reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown in
Figure 2-166.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-166 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
TMC11H)

Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.

Context
Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the
cabinet. Table 2-38 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets
after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-38 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
TMC11H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
TMC11H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
extension
TMC11H
and RFC)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
RJ45
port on the
connector
CMUEA in
the extension
TMC11H

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown in
Figure 2-167.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-167 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
TMC11H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the extension TMC11H
and RFC), as shown in Figure 2-168.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the extension TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-168 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the extension TMC11H and RFC)

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 2-39 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-39 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario
of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs
Cable

One End

The Other End

Change
Type

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC11H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan
assembly in
the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU of the
TMC11H

To be
reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
the
extension
TMC11H
and RFC)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
extension
TMC11H

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC

To be
reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
two RFCs)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the right
RFC

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the left RFC

To be
reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown in
Figure 2-169.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-169 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
TMC11H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the extension TMC11H
and RFC), as shown in Figure 2-170.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the right RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the extension TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-170 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the extension TMC11H and RFC)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shown
in Figure 2-171.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the left RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the right RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-171 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
two RFCs)

Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

2.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables


This section describes the procedure for installing inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or singlemode base station.

Prerequisites
l

The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.

The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.

The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.

Optical modules can be divided into single- and multimode optical modules, which can be
distinguished as follows:
l

The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical
module is black or gray.

The transmission mode is displayed as "SM" on the label of a single-mode optical module
and "MM" on the label of a multimode optical module.

There is a label on each optical module, which provides information such as the rate, wavelength,
and transmission mode, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-172 Label on an optical module

(1) Rate

(2) Wavelength

(3) Transmission mode

Context
The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBU
signal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU Signal
Cable Connections.
Table 2-40 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected
Interconnection
Mode

Installation Position
BBU 0

BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU

CI port on the UMPT_U

M1 port on the UCIU

CI port on the UMPT_L

HEI port on the WBBPf

HEI port on the WBBPf

NOTE

BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.

NOTICE
The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than
20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20
minutes.
The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBU
signal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU Signal
Cable Connections.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-41 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected


Interconnection
Mode

Installation Position
BBU 0

BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU

CI port on the UMPT_U

M1 port on the UCIU

CI port on the UMPT_L

HEI port on the WBBPf

HEI port on the WBBPf

CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT

NOTICE
A color-coding tape marked Master is attached to one end of an inter-BBU cable that connects
two UMPTs in different BBUs. When installing the cable, connect the end marked Master to
the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 0 and the other end to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 1.
NOTE

BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.

NOTICE
The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than
20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20
minutes.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the optical
modules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.
1.

Lower the puller of the optical module.

2.

Insert the optical module into the port.

3.

Raise the puller of the optical module.

Figure 2-173 Installing the optical module

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 2-174.
Figure 2-174 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable

Step 3 Install one or two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT. The following
figure shows the installation of two inter-BBU signal cables.
NOTE

l You need to install two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+UL mode.
l You need to install only one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+L or GL+U
mode.

1.

Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.

2.

Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU
1.

Step 4 Install one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the WBBPf to the WBBPf, as shown in the
following figure. The inter-BBU signal cable is installed only to interconnect the WBBPf in a
BBU to the WBBPf in another BBU.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.
NOTE

l When two BBUs are installed in the APM30H, connect the signal cables, as shown in Figure 2-175. When
BBU 0 is installed in the APM30H and BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H, connect the signal cables, as
shown in Figure 2-176.
l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the same
type as those on BBU 0.
l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1A
and 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1.
l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-175 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (1)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-176 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (2)

Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patch
cord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBU
interconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is used
as a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End

2.11.8 Installing the RF Jumper


The RF jumper transmits signals between the RFU and antenna system.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a cable cutter, PVC insulation tape, and an openend wrench or torque wrench.

Procedure
Step 1 Route the RF jumper into the cabinet through the cable outlet in the cabinet according to one of
the manners shown in Figure 2-177. Lay out the installed RF jumper according to the instructions
in Cabling Requirements.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-177 Routing of the RF jumper

Step 2 Install the RF jumper, as shown in Figure 2-179 and Figure 2-178.

NOTICE
Connect each RF jumper securely to prevent RF signal leakage.

Figure 2-178 Installing RF jumpers for interconnected RFUs

NOTE

Inter-RFU RF signal cables have been installed in the cabinet before delivery. You only need to check whether
the cables are securely connected.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-179 Installing RF jumpers for independent RFUs

1.

Connect the DIN connector on the RF jumper to the ANT port on the RFU panel.

2.

Use a 32 mm (1.26 in.) open-end wrench or torque wrench to tighten the two DIN
connectors from bottom to top. Ensure that the tightening torque reaches 25 Nm to 35 Nm
(221.27 lbfin. to 309.78 lbfin.).
Figure 2-180 Tightening the DIN connectors

Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumper according to the instructions in Attaching the Color Ring.
Step 4 Connect the DIN straight male connector at the other end of the jumper to the connector on the
feeder.
----End

2.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable


The CPRI electrical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RFU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables into the CPRI ports on the
corresponding board in the BBU.
NOTE

For the details about the cable connections,


l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware
Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing CPRI Cables.

Step 2 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cable through the cable hole on the inner left side of
the power cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the corresponding
RFU, as shown in Figure 2-181.
Figure 2-181 Installing the CPRI electrical cable

Step 3 Connect the SFP connector on the CPRI electrical cable to the CPRI0 port on the panel of the
RFU, as shown in Figure 2-181.
Step 4 Route the cables by referring to Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind the cables.
NOTE

l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cable at the top of the DCDU-12A in the RFC or in the
base of the RFC.
l Lay out the cable according to the manners in Figure 2-181. Ensure that the cable is routed to the RFU
through the cable bridge above the RFUs.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 5 Attach labels to the installed cables. For details, see Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End

2.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable


The CPRI fiber optic cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RRU.

Context
l

Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled
as MM.

The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multi-mode optical
module is black or gray.

The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.

For details about the connections of CPRI fiber optic cables, see "CPRI Cable Connections"
in the BTS900A Hardware Description.

NOTICE
The performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes may
be abnormal. Therefore, you must insert an fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module
within 20 minutes.
For the details about the cable connections,
l

SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.

SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base
Station Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 2-182.
1.

Lower the puller on the optical module.

2.

Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU/WBBP/LBBP. Then insert an
optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU.
NOTE

Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Raise the puller on the optical module.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-182 Installing the optical module

Step 2 Install a CPRI fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 2-183.


1.

Stick a temporary label to the CPRI fiber optic cable to be installed.

2.

Remove the dustproof cap from the connector on the fiber optic cable.

3.

Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into
the optical modules in the WBBPLBBPGTMU, WBBP, or LBBPGTMU or WBBP, and
then insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module
in the RF module.

NOTICE
l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the break-out fiber optic
cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18
in.), respectively.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX port on the BBU must be connected to the
TX port on the RF module, and the RX port on the BBU must be connected to the RX
port on the RF module.

Figure 2-183 Installing the CPRI fiber optic cable

Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cable along the left of the cabinet, and then lead it out of the cabinet
from the cable hole on the left of the bottom. For details, see Cabling Requirements.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 4 Replace the temporary label on the CPRI fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For detailed
operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

2.12 Installation Checklist


After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cable-related items.

Cabinet Installation Checklist


Table 2-42 describes the cabinet installation checklist.
Table 2-42 Cabinet installation checklist
No.

Item

The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineering
design.

The base is securely installed.

All the bolts, including those for electrical connections, are tightened. The spring
washers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.

The cabinet is neat and clean.

The paint on the surface is satisfactory. The damaged paint is repaired. For details,
see 2.14.3 Repainting.

Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.

Installation Environment Checklist


Table 2-43 describes the installation environment checklist.
Table 2-43 Installation environment checklist
No.

Item

No excessive straps or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.

No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around the cabinet.

Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.

Electrical Connection Checklist


Table 2-44 describes the electrical connection checklist.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-44 Electrical connection checklist


No.

Item

All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters. There
should not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.

The PGND cable is securely connected and the AC input power cable and cables
in the cabinet are correctly connected according to the electrical design of the power
system. The screws are tightened. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not shortcircuited.

The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.

The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are securely soldered
or crimped.

The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heat
shrink tubing.

The flat washer and the spring washer are well mounted on all OT terminals.

The exterior of the battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.

The shell of the battery is clean without any leakage trace.

The wiring post on the battery stands properly without any damage, and the post is
not covered with any acid substances.

10

The pressure relief valve of the battery is not deformed, and no liquid leaks.

11

The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positive
and negative poles.

12

The voltage of the battery is normal.


l The voltage of a 2 V battery cell ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.
l The voltage of a 12 V battery cell ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.
l The total voltage of the batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.

13

The circuit breakers for the batteries are set to OFF.

Cable Installation Checklist


Table 2-45 describes the cable installation checklist.
Table 2-45 Cable installation checklist

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No.

Item

All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are securely
connected. All cable connectors at the bottom of the cabinet are securely installed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

No.

Item

The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and face
the same direction.

Different types of power cables are bound separately when being routed, for
example, the power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, and E1/T1/
FE cables.

The layout of all cables facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion. For
example, the maintenance transfer cable is bound to the outside of the BBU cable
claw, as shown in Figure 2-184.

Legible labels are attached to both ends of all cables.

The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smooth
without sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.2 in.) of the
outdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.

The port that no cable is connected to is properly protected.

The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid false connection that will cause
an abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).

Figure 2-184 Checking the maintenance transfer cable

Checklist for the Hardware Upgrade


Table 2-46 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-46 Checklist for the hardware upgrade

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No
.

Cabinet Type

Item

APM30H/
TMC11H

The ground cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 2.6.5 Replacing the Power System.

APM30H/
TMC11H

The vacant customer space in the cabinet has been configured with
the filler module.

APM30H/
TMC11H

The ELU has been replaced, For detailed operations, see 2.7.4
Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are
correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

APM30H

The input power cable for the APM30H has been replaced. For
detailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cable for the
APM30H.

APM30H

The input power cable for the junction box has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

APM30H

The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

APM30H

The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has been
installed. For detailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in
the Cabinet.

APM30H

The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,
see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 2.10.1 Installing
the BBU Case.

APM30H

The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,
see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

10

APM30H

The monitoring signal transfer cable and CMUEA-BBU


monitoring signal cable have been installed. For detailed
operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

11

APM30H

The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has been
installed. For detailed operations, see 2.6.7 Installing Cables in
the Cabinet.

12

TMC11H

The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

13

TMC11H

The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has been
installed. For detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in
the Cabinet.

14

TMC11H

The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,
see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 2.10.1 Installing
the BBU Case.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

No
.

Cabinet Type

Item

15

TMC11H

The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,
see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

16

TMC11H

The CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed.


For detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in the
Cabinet.

17

TMC11H

The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has been
installed. For detailed operations, see 2.7.6 Installing Cables in
the Cabinet.

18

RFC

The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 2.8.3
Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are
correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

19

RFC

The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,


monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, and ELU signal
cable have been installed. For detailed operations, see 2.8.7
Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

20

RFC

In DC scenarios, the junction box has been installed. For detailed


operations, see 2.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction
Box.

21

RFC

In AC scenarios, the input power cable for the RFC has been
replaced. For detailed operations, see Installing Power Cables
from the APM30H to the RFCs.

22

RFC

The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. For
detailed operations, see (Optional) Installing the RRU Power
Cable or (Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable.

23

IBBS200D/
IBBS200T

The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 2.9.3
Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are
correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

2.13 Powering On a Base Station


This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply
to the components in a cabinet.

Prerequisites
l

Input power cables for the BTS3900A are correctly connected.

The power supply to the BTS3900A meets the requirements of the power system.

The external power supply to the BTS3900A has been shut off.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.

All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.

All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T have
been set to OFF.

Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.

Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.

Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.

Context

DANGER
Exercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves some high voltage
operations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact with the input voltage using
a damp object may be fatal.

NOTICE
l Power on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power off a cabinet or
BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU for
maintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-47 Circuit breakers in BTS3900A base stations


Base
Station

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

BTS3900A
(Ver.B)

EPS 01A or EPS 01C,


DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box

l Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A or EPS 01C


l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2
circuit breakers on the power distribution box
in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU0 to
RFU5 circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 (The
circuit breakers control the power input to the
BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control the
power input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan
assembly, and customer transmission
equipment.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control the
power input to the BBU, fan assembly, and
customer transmission equipment.)

BTS3900A
(Ver.C)

EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box

l Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02 or


EPU03A-04
l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2
circuit breakers on the power distribution box
in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11A (SW0 to SW8 circuit breakers
control the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,
FAN 01B, and BBU 0 and BBU 1. The SW9
circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers
control the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,
BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA, and FAN 02B. The
SW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakers
control the power input to the transmission
equipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakers
control the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1,
EMUA, and FAN 02B.)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Base
Station

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

BTS3900A
(Ver.D)

EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

l Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02 or


EPU05A-04
l BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers on
the power distribution box in an IBBS200D or
IBBS200T
l Switch on the power distribution box in an
IBBS700D or IBBS700T

NOTE

(1) In this section, EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 and EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU, EPS 01A
or EPS 01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.

Process
The following figure shows the power-on check process.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-185 Power-on check process

Procedure
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Power on an AC base station.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

1.

Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and
the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.

2.

Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuit
breaker on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distribution
box in the battery cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this substep.

3.

Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and battery
cabinet.

4.

Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON,
and check the power supply status of each component.
Table 2-48 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU or EPS
Cabinet

Compone
nt

Normal Power Supply Status

APM30H

PMU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.

PSU

l The power indicator is steady green.


l The fault indicator is steady off.

Fan
assembly

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Fan in the
front door

The fan is working properly.

IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T

Fan or TEC
in the front
door

The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUN


indicator on the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA is
blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s
and off for 1s).

IBBS700D

Fan in the
front door
and
CMUEA

The fan is working properly, and the RUN indicator


on the CMUEA is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

IBBS700T

TEC and
CMUF

The TEC is working properly, and the RUN indicator


on the CMUF is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

5.

Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on each DCDU
in the RFC and TMC11H to ON. Skip this substep if there is no circuit breaker on the
DCDU, such as the DCDU-12A, DCDU-12B, and DCDU-12C.

6.

Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.

7.

Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-49 Normal status of components in the cabinet


Cabinet

Compone
nt

Normal Power Supply Status

APM30H

BBU

l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.


l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).
l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off
for 1s). The indicators indicating the status of the
CPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.

TMC11H

RFC

FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

Fan in the
front door

The fan is working properly.

RFU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

RRU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off


for 1s).

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

l The ALM indicator is steady off.


a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, check
whether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.

NOTE

The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators, see
BBU Hardware Description.

8.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,
handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 2-50 Troubleshooting


Failure Type

Handling Measure

Failure in the power


supply to all
components in the
cabinet

Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.

Failure in the power


supply to a board in
the BBU

Check as follows:

l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit


breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.
l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.

1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the


slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.
Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the status
of indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove the
board, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards of
the same type, and check the status of the indicators.
l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.
l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Failure Type

Handling Measure

Failure in the power


supply to other
components in the
cabinet

Check as follows:
1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skip
this step and go to step 2 if this component does not use
any fuse terminal block.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse according
to the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, go
to step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to the
component.
l If the input power is normal, replace the component.
l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connected
securely. If the power cable is not securely
connected, turn off the circuit breaker for the
component (if there is no circuit breaker for the
component, remove the connector from the power
unit) and reconnect the power cable. If the power
cable is securely connected, the protector (such as
circuit breaker or fuse) on the component may be
damaged. In this case, replace the damaged
protector. If the protector cannot be replaced,
replace the upper-level power distribution
component.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Power on a DC base station.


1.

Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and
the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.

2.

Turn on the external power switch to power on the RFC cabinet. Power on the
TMC11H if it is configured as a transmission cabinet.

3.

Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the RFC to ON.
Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as DCDU-12A
and DCDU-12B.

4.

Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the TMC11H
to ON. Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as
DCDU-12C.

5.

Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.

6.

Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Table 2-51 Normal status of components in the cabinet


Cabinet

Compone
nt

Normal Power Supply Status

TMC11H

BBU

l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.


l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).
l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off
for 1s).

RFC

FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

Fan in the
front door

The fan is working properly.

RFU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

RRU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

7.

Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,
handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.
Table 2-52 Troubleshooting

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Failure Type

Handling Measure

Failure in the power


supply to all
components in the
cabinet

Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.


l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.
l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Failure Type

Handling Measure

Failure in the power


supply to a board in
the BBU

Check as follows:
1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.
Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the status
of indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove the
board, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards of
the same type, and check the status of the indicators.
l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.
l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.

Failure in the power


supply to other
components in the
cabinet

Check as follows:
1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skip
this step and go to step 2 if this component does not use
any fuse terminal block.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse according
to the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, go
to step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to the
component.
l If the input power is normal, replace the component.
l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connected
securely. If the power cable is not securely
connected, turn off the circuit breaker for the
component (if there is no circuit breaker for the
component, remove the connector from the power
unit) and reconnect the power cable. If the power
cable is securely connected, the protector (such as
circuit breaker or fuse) on the component may be
damaged. In this case, replace the damaged
protector. If the protector cannot be replaced,
replace the upper-level power distribution
component.

----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

2.14 Subsequent Operations


This section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgraded
and checked.

2.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door


The barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label on the cabinet
door need to be replaced after the upgrade.

Context
The front door of the cabinet has been replaced during restructuring of the APM30H and
TMC11H cabinets. You only need to replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card,
and power distribution label.

Procedure
Step 1 Stick the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to the
APM30H and TMC11H cabinets. Their positions are shown in Figure 2-186.
Figure 2-186 Positions of labels for the cabinet

(1) Barcode label

(2) Qualification card

(3) Power distribution label

(4) Nameplate

Step 2 Replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label in the RFC
and IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinets.
1.

Take out the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label
for the cabinet.

2.

Stick the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to
the same positions as the original labels in the cabinet.

----End

2.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets


After all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable outlets on the cabinet and base.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Procedure
Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes on both sides of the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC,
IBBS200T, or IBBS200D cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-187 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, IBBS200T, or
IBBS200D cabinet

(1) Fireproof mud

Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.
1.

Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet module
on the bottom of the cabinet.

2.

Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.

3.

Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-188 Sealing the cable holes in the RFC

(1) Cable holes for the


power cables

(2) Cable holes for CPRI (3) Cable hole for the
electrical cables
monitoring signal cable

(4) Cable hole for the


equipotential cable

(5) Cable hole for the


monitoring signal cable

(6) Screw

Step 3 Use baffle plates to block redundant space in the cable outlets and tighten the two screws on
each baffle plate, as shown in Figure 2-189.
Figure 2-189 Sealing the cable outlets on the base

(1) Baffle plate on the right

(2) Baffle plate at the rear

(3) Baffle plate on the left

Step 4 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in Figure 2-190.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

262

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Figure 2-190 Sealing cable outlets on the base using fireproof mud

(1) Fireproof mud

(2) PVC corrugated pipe

Step 5 Tighten the three screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate.
----End

2.14.3 Repainting
The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept satisfactory. Therefore, any damaged paint
must be repaired.

Prerequisites
Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 2-53.
Table 2-53 Color codes
Applied to

Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U

Procedure
Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, rub the area with sandpaper
slightly to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in Figure 2-191.
Figure 2-191 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from the
rubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown in
Figure 2-192.
Figure 2-192 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol

Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.
Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then apply
the paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in Figure 2-193.

NOTICE
The paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, and
the surface should be smooth.

Figure 2-193 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.C) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_C)

Step 5 Perform subsequent operations after the repaired paint coating is exposed in the air for 30
minutes.
NOTE

The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the surrounding areas, without
obvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no longer be distinguishable. In addition, there
should be no paint peeled off.

----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to


BTS3900A (Ver.D_B)

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade BTS3900A (Ver.B)
to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).
3.1 Installation Preparations
This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also
specifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
3.2 Application Scenarios
Multiple cabinets can be configured and installed for the BTS3900A to meet the requirements
for different RF unit configurations, backup power capacity, and space for customer equipment.
A BTS3900A can be configured with only RFUs or both RFUs and RRUs depending on different
scenarios.
3.3 Unpacking Check
Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
3.4 Restructuring Process
This section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade of BTS3900A
(Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C).
3.5 Powering Off the Base Station
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for powering off the base station.
3.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30H
cabinet to be restructured.
3.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11H
cabinet to be restructured.
3.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFC
cabinet to be restructured.
3.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.
3.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables
This chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting the
modules to external devices.
3.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinets
during the upgrade.
3.12 Installation Checklist
After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cable-related items.
3.13 Powering On a Base Station
This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply
to the components in a cabinet.
3.14 Subsequent Operations
This section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgraded
and checked.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

3.1 Installation Preparations


This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also
specifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.

3.1.1 Pre-upgrade Check


This section describes the operations that must be taken before the hardware upgrade.
You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:
l

Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properly
before the upgrade.

Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.
Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need to
contact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.

3.1.2 Upgrade Preparations


This section describes the preparations needed for the upgrade.
Table 3-1 lists the requirements on the current software version of the base station before the
upgrade.
Table 3-1 Versions before the upgrade
Product Name

Version before Upgrade

SingleRAN7.0 series

V100R007C00SPC240 and later

SingleRAN6.0 series

V100R004C00SPC190 and later

3.1.3 Documents
This section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.
l

Before the installation, familiarize yourself with related information in the following
documents:
3900 Series Base Station Hardware Description
3900 Series Base Station Cables
BBU3900 Hardware Description
RFU Hardware Description
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Installation Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Installation Guide
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide
BTS3900A (Ver.B) Site Maintenance Guide or BTS3900A (Ver.C) Site Maintenance
Guide
Safety Precautions

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

During the installation, refer to the following document:


Installation Reference

3.1.4 Tools and Instruments


This section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.
Marker

Phillips screwdriver (M3 to


M6)

Diagonal pliers

Flat-head screwdriver (M3 to


M6)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

32 mm (1.26 in.)
combination wrench

Socket wrench

Torque wrench

Power cable crimping tool

RJ45 crimping tool

Cable cutter

Rubber mallet

Soldering iron

Wire stripper

Hammer drill (16)

Heat gun

Level

Multimeter

Measuring tape

Vacuum cleaner

ESD wrist strap

ESD gloves

Torque screwdriver

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

269

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Gloves

3.1.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel


Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite
personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:
l

The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with the
proper installation and operation methods.

The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installation
environment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary.

3.2 Application Scenarios


Multiple cabinets can be configured and installed for the BTS3900A to meet the requirements
for different RF unit configurations, backup power capacity, and space for customer equipment.
A BTS3900A can be configured with only RFUs or both RFUs and RRUs depending on different
scenarios.

3.2.1 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs


Only
When only RFUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the
BTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and -48 V DC power supply
scenario.

Cabinet Configuration Principles


l

A BTS3900A site can be configured with a maximum of 12 RFUs.

The maximum cabinet configuration of a BTS3900A site is 1 APM30H+1 TMC11H+2


RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts. There must be a clearance of 40 mm (1.57 in.) between
the cabinets installed side by side.

The RFC can only be stacked below the APM30H or TMC11H.

The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can be stacked only with the IBBS200D, IBBS200T, or
TMC11H. The IBBS200D or IBBS200T can only be stacked below the TMC11H.

When a site is configured with over six RFUs and only one IBBS200D or IBBS200T, the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T must be configured with at least two groups of 92 Ah storage
batteries to avoid overcurrent of a single battery group during discharging.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

270

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

If an auxiliary cabinet such as the IBBS200D/IBBS200T or TMC11H is required during


initial site deployment, the auxiliary cabinet is positioned on the left side of the basic
cabinet. If both the battery cabinet and transmission cabinet are required, the battery cabinet
is positioned on the left of the basic cabinet, and the transmission cabinet is stacked on the
battery cabinet or positioned on the left of the battery cabinet.

During base station deployment, space must be reserved for capacity expansion in the
future. Unless otherwise stated, during capacity expansion the original cabinets remain in
the original positions and new cabinets are added to the right of original cabinets. In a
special scenario, new cabinets can be added to the left of original cabinets.

When a BTS3900A is configured with two BBUs and both BBUs are connected to RFUs,
the BBUs must be interconnected.

A BTS3900A configured with one APM30H and one RFC is configured with one BBU by
default. It can be configured with a maximum of two BBUs, and the power consumption
of all BBU boards cannot exceed 1000 W. This principle applies to a new or expansion
scenario.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-mode Base Station


A single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, and the BBU is installed
in the APM30H or TMC11H. When seven to twelve RFUs need to be configured, two RFCs are
required.
Table 3-2 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 3-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or
220 V AC

No backup
power

5U

6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

5U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs

16 U

6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H

16 U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
TMC11H

5U

6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T

5U

12 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
one battery
cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

271

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

16 U

6 RFUs

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H

Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets

-48 V DC

16 U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H

5U

6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

5U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

16 U

6 RFUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H

16 U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H

9U

6 RFUs

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

12 RFUs

1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

6 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

12 RFUs

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

20 U

In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment
and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

272

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-1 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is no
backup power

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 3-1 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1 TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1
APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original
configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1 TMC11H.

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,
the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-2 and
Figure 3-3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

273

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-2 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by an IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

274

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-3 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by an IBBS700D/IBBS700T

When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site,
the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-4.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

275

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by two battery cabinets

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 3-4 are two modes of configuring 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H. (A) indicates that 1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H is the initial
configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original configuration of 1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base
station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations
are shown in Figure 3-5.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

276

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-5 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

NOTE

(A) and (B) in Figure 3-5 are two modes of configuring 2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs. (A) indicates that 2
TMC11Hs+2 RFCs is the initial configuration. (B) indicates that one RFC is added to the original
configuration of 2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC.

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station


Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l

Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30H
and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

Table 3-3 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different backup
power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 3-3 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or
220 V AC

No backup
power

3U

12 RFUs

1 APM30H+2 RFCs

(1)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

277

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Backup
power
provided by
a single
battery
cabinet

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

14 U

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+1
TMC11H

3U

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

14 U

l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+2 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H

-48 V DC

Backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets

3U

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

14 U

1 APM30H+2 RFCs+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H

7U

1 TMC11H+2 RFCs

18 U

2 TMC11Hs+2 RFCs

NOTE

(1) A maximum of 12 RFUs are supported by a triple-mode base station. If there are more than 12 RFUs,
an extra base station is required.

In the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment are
shown in Figure 3-6.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

278

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-6 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is not
required

When a single cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with
different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 3-7.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

279

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-7 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by a single battery cabinet

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
with different space for customer equipment are shown in Figure 3-8.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

280

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-8 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by two battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station are
shown in Figure 3-9.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

281

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-9 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

3.2.2 Application Scenarios of a BTS3900A Configured with RFUs


and RRUs
When RFUs and RRUs are configured, different configurations of cabinets can be used for the
BTS3900A in the 110 V AC/220 V AC power supply scenario and 48 V DC power supply
scenario.

Cabinet Configuration Principles


l

A single BTS3900A can be configured with a maximum of six RFUs and nine RRUs.
Therefore, more than one BTS3900As must be deployed if more than six RFUs and nine
RRUs are required.

When a BTS3900A is configured with both RFUs and RRUs, a DCDU-12B is needed to
be installed in RFC, the maximum configuration of RRUs is six RRUs of 2*60 W and three
RRUs of 2*40 W.

When both the RFU and RRU support the GSM mode, the BBU3900 must be configured
with a GTMUb. In addition, the RFUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the
GTMUb, and the RRUs supporting the GSM mode are connected to the UBRI.

Cabinet Configurations of a Single- or Dual-Mode Base Station


A single- or dual-mode base station is configured with only one BBU, which is installed in the
APM30H or TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

282

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 3-4 describes the cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with
different backup power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 3-4 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station
Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or
220 V AC

No backup
power

5U

6 RFUs+9
RRUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
one storage
battery
cabinet

5U

16 U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

16 U

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H

-48 V DC

Initial
configuratio
n of backup
power
provided by
two storage
battery
cabinets

5U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

16 U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+2
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H

9U

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

20 U

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station with different space for customer equipment
and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-10.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

283

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-10 Cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station when there is
no backup power

When the backup power is provided by one battery cabinet in the initial configuration of a site,
the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by one battery cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

284

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

When the backup power is provided by two battery cabinets in the initial configuration of a site,
the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode base station in the case of different
space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-12.
Figure 3-12 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station when backup power
is provided by two battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a single-mode or dual-mode


base station in the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier
configurations are shown in Figure 3-13.
Figure 3-13 Cabinet configurations of a single- or dual-mode base station in the -48 V DC
scenario

Cabinet Configurations of a Triple-Mode Base Station


Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l

Two BBUs are configured in initial site deployment. The BBUs are installed in an APM30H
and transmission equipment is installed in a TMC11H.

During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

285

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 3-5 lists the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station with different backup
power capacities, space for customer equipment, and carrier configurations.
Table 3-5 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
Power
Supply

Backup
Power
Capacity

Space for
Customer
Equipmen
t

Carrier
Configurat
ion

Cabinet Configuration

110 V AC or
220 V AC

No backup
power

3U

6 RFUs+9
RRUs

1 APM30H+1 RFC

Backup
power
provided by
a single
battery
cabinet

3U

14 U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T

14 U

l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1
TMC11H
l 1 APM30H+1 RFC+1
IBBS700D/IBBS700T+1
TMC11H

-48 V DC

Backup
power
provided by
two battery
cabinets

3U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+4
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts

14 U

1 APM30H+1 RFC+4
IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1
TMC11H

7U

1 TMC11H+1 RFC

18 U

2 TMC11Hs+1 RFC

In the 110 V or 220 V AC power supply scenario, if power backup is not required, the cabinet
configurations of a triple-mode base station with different space for customer equipment and
carrier configurations are shown in Figure 3-14.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

286

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-14 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is not
required

When a single battery cabinet is required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
3-15 and Figure 3-16.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

287

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-15 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by one IBBS200D/IBBS200T

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

288

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-16 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by one IBBS700D/IBBS700T

When two battery cabinets are required, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station
with different space for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown in Figure
3-17.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

289

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-17 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station when backup power is provided
by two battery cabinets

When -48 V DC power is provided, the cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in
the case of different space required for customer equipment and carrier configurations are shown
in Figure 3-18.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

290

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-18 Cabinet configurations of a triple-mode base station in the -48 V DC scenario

3.3 Unpacking Check


Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.

Context
NOTE

When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l

Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.

Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweatsoaked gloves, or dirty gloves.

NOTICE
l Powered on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

291

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

If...

Then...

The total number tallies with the packing


list

Go to Step 2.

The total number does not tally with the


packing list

Find out the cause and report any missing


articles to the local Huawei office.

Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.


If...

Then...

The exterior of the packing case is intact

Go to Step 3.

The outer packing is severely damaged or Find out the cause and report any missing
soaked
articles to the local Huawei office.
The mark on the shockwatch label is red.

Do not open the case. Claim compensation


from the transportation company.

Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list.
If...

Then...

Types and quantity of the article tally with Sign the Packing List with the customer.
those on the packing list
There are any goods missing, incorrectly
delivered, or damaged

Send feedback to the local Huawei office.

CAUTION
To protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep the
unpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment,
packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file the
photos.
----End

3.4 Restructuring Process


This section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade of BTS3900A
(Ver.B) or BTS3900A (Ver.C).
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

292

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Restructuring Process in AC Scenarios


Figure 3-19 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied with
AC power.
Figure 3-19 Restructuring process

Restructuring Process in DC Scenarios


Figure 3-20 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied with
DC power.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

293

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-20 Restructuring process

3.5 Powering Off the Base Station


This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for powering off the base station.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

294

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Context
From MBTS V100R009C00 onwards, the name of the element management system (EMS) is
changed from M2000 to U2000.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: If a replaced RFU is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking for TX
channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.
NOTE

l If a replaced RFU is faulty, its maximum output power locking for TX channels does not need to be
disabled.
l If the maximum output power has not been set for the RFU, the maximum output power for TX channels
is the maximum transmit power of the hardware.

1.

Check the maximum output power has been locked for TX channels of the new RFU, and
record the result.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the cabinet
number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU. Run the
DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number, slot number,
and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum output power for
TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has been locked.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the DSP RRU command to query the
cabinet number, subrack number, slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU.
Run the DSP TXBRANCH command and set the cabinet number, subrack number,
slot number, and TX channel number of the RFU to check the hardware maximum
output power for TX channels of the RFU and whether the maximum output power has
been locked.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site Maintenance
Terminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-click
Lock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Query Config tab. On the displayed tab page,
select the target RFU.
If...

Then...

The maximum output power has been


locked for TX channels

Go to Step 1.2.

The maximum output power has not been


locked for TX channels

Go to 2.

NOTE

The maximum output power of some RFUs cannot be queried by running the DSP TXBRANCH
command. If the value of the maximum output power invalid in the query result for an RFU, the RFU
does not support the maximum output power locking.

2.

Set the maximum output power of the RFU to 0 to disable the maximum output power
locking.
l Log in to the NodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable the
maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to reset

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

295

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum output
power of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the eNodeB through the LMT. Run the LOC RRUTC command to disable
the maximum output power locking for TX channels. Run the RST BRD command to
reset the RFU. Run the DSP TXBRANCH command to check whether the maximum
output power of each RFU is set successfully.
l Log in to the GBTS through the SMT. In the left pane of the Site Maintenance
Terminal System window, click Site. In the right pane of the window, double-click
Lock RXU Traffic Capability. Click the Config tab. On the displayed tab page, set
the parameters to disable the maximum output power locking for TX channels, and click
Set. Reset the RFU to make the configuration take effect.
NOTE

If there is more than one RFU, reset the TX channels of each RFU separately. If RFUs are cascaded,
perform the operations from the lowest-level RFU to the highest-level RFU to minimize the impact
on services carried by the RFUs.

Step 2 Ask the M2000/U2000 administrator to block the RFU.


l On the NodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the eNodeB, run the UBL BRD command to block the RFU.
l On the BSC, run the SET GTRXADMSTAT command and set ADMSTAT to LOCK to
block all carriers of the RFU.
NOTE

l Block the RFU before replacing the module or separately replacing the RF jumper.
l If RFU to be replaced works in multiple modes, block the RFU in all modes it supports.
l An RFU working in GSM mode cannot be blocked, and therefore you can block only the carriers of
the RFU in GSM mode.

Step 3 Verify that TX channels of the RFU are disabled. In this case, the ACT indicator on the RFU
panel is blinking (on for 1s and off for 1s).
Step 4 Power off the RFC.
If...

Then...

RFC(Ver.B)

Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 in the RFC.

RFC(Ver.C)

Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11A in the RFC.

Step 5 Power off the TMC.


If...

Then...

TMC11H(Ver.B) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-03B or DCDU-03C in the
TMC.
TMC11H(Ver.C) Switch off all circuit breakers on the DCDU-11B or DCDU-11C in the
TMC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

296

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 6 Switch off all circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200T or IBBS200D.
Step 7 Power off the APM30H.
If...

Then...

APM30H(Ver.B)

Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPS in the APM30H.

APM30H(Ver.C)

Switch off all circuit breakers on the EPU in the APM30H.

Step 8 Turn off the switch on the external power equipment for the BTS3900A.
----End

3.6 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30H
cabinet to be restructured.

3.6.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the


APM30H
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and added
during the restructuring of the APM30H.

Component Changes in the APM30H


Figure 3-21 shows component changes in the APM30H.
Figure 3-21 Components in the APM30H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

297

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

FAN 02A

To be
replace
d

The FAN 02A needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D to


enhance the heat dissipation capability.

SLPU

Reused

ELU

To be
replace
d

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needs


to be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.

PSU (AC/
DC)

To be
replace
d

The PSUs need to be replaced to enhance the power


distribution capability.

Door status
sensor

Reused

EPS 01
subrack

To be
replace
d

The EPS 01 subrack needs to be replaced with an


EPU05A to meet higher requirements for the power
system.

BBU3900

Reused

GATM

To be
remove
d

EMUA

Reused

10

AC heater

Reused

11

SOU

Reused

12

Front door

To be
replace
d

The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heat


dissipation capacity of the cabinet.

13

Junction
box

Reused

14

PMU

To be
replace
d

The PMU needs to be replaced to enhance the power


distribution capability.

15

FAN 02B

To be
replace
d

The FAN 02B needs to be replaced by a FAN 02D to


enhance the heat dissipation capability.

16

EPU03A
subrack

To be
replace
d

The EPS 03A subrack needs to be replaced with an


EPU05A to meet higher requirements for the power
system.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

298

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

17

Front door

To be
replace
d

The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heat


dissipation capacity of the cabinet.

Cable Changes in the APM30H


Figure 3-22 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30H.
Figure 3-22 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

299

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
1

Input
power
cable for
a
junction
box

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the L1
and N1
terminals
in the AC
OUTPUT
terminal
box of the
EPS.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
L1 and N1
terminals in the
AC OUTPUT
terminal box of
the EPU.

Power
cable for
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l One end
connects
to the
LOAD0
port on
the EPS.
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on the fan
assembly
in the
APM30H
.

Reu
sed

l The other end


connects to the
L and N
terminals in the
junction box.

l The other
end
connects
to the L
and N
terminals
in the
junction
box.
P
2

Cha
nge
Typ
e

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects to the
LOAD5 port on
the EPU.

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in the
APM30H.

300

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
3

BBU
power
cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connects
to the
LOAD1
port on
the EPS.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connects to the
BBU_0 or
BBU_1 port on
the EPU.

l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

P
4

EMUA
power
cable

l Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
l The other
end is
cord end
terminals.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l The other
end
connects
to the
-48V port
on the
UPEU in
the BBU.
l One end
connects
to the
LOAD7
port on
the EPS.
l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.

l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l Tool-less
female
connector
(pressfit
type)
l The other
end is
cord end
terminals.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Cha
nge
Typ
e
To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU.

l One end
connects to the
LOAD4 port on
the EPU.
l The other end
connects to the
PWR1 port on
the EMUA.

The
y
can
be
used
cont
inuo
usly
and
their
conn
ecto
rs
need
to be
repl
aced
onsit
e.

301

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
5

SOU
power
cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

l One end
is OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the M4
ground
screw,
L1, and
N1
terminals
(AC
OUTPUT
) on the
EPS.

l One end
is OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
M4 ground
screw, L1, and
N1 terminals
(AC OUTPUT)
on the EPU.

l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.

l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.

Cha
nge
Typ
e
Reu
sed

l The other end


connects to the
AC INPUT port
on the SOU.

l The other
end
connects
to the AC
INPUT
port on
the SOU.
P
6

Heater
power
cable

l One end
is OT
terminals.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.

l One end
connects
to the AC
output
wiring
terminal
in the AC
junction
box and
the
ground
bar in the
APM30H
cabinet

l One end
is OT
terminals.
l The other
end is a
C13
connector
.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
input port
on the
heater.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects to the
AC output
wiring terminal
in the AC
junction box
and the ground
bar in the
APM30H
cabinet

Reu
sed

l The other end


connects to the
power input
port on the
heater.

302

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
7

Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

Cha
nge
Typ
e

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.

To
be
repl
aced

l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.

l The other end


connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.

Figure 3-23 shows the signal cable changes in the APM30H.


Figure 3-23 Signal cable changes in the APM30H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

303

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S1

Cable

Environmen
t monitoring
signal cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are DB50
male
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
COM
port on
the
PMU.

Both ends
are DB50
male
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
COM
port on
the
PMU.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
PMU_D
B50 port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S2

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status
sensor in the
APM30H

l One end
is a 2-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.

Remove
d

l The
other end
connects
to the
PMU_D
B50 port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
l One end
is a 2-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is
bare
wires.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

304

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S3

Cable

Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port
on the
PMU.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port on
the
PMU.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S4

CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.

Change
Type

To be
replaced

l The
other end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
-

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connects
to the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU in
the
BBU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

305

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S5

Cable

ELU signal
cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.
S6

Monitoring
signal cable
for the fan in
the front
door

Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
transfer
box in
the front
door of
the
APM30
H.

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.
Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
FAN_E
XT port
on the
fan
assembl
y in the
APM30
H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Change
Type

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects
to the
transfer
box in
the front
door of
the
APM30
H.

To be
replaced

l The
other end
connects
to the
FAN_E
XT port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.

306

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S7

Cable

EMUA
monitoring
signal cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

l One end
is a DB9
male
connecto
r.

l One end
connects
to the
RS-485
port on
the
EMUA.

l One end
is a DB9
male
connecto
r.

l One end
connects
to the
RS-485
port on
the
EMUA.

l The
other is
an RJ45
connecto
r.

S8

Surge
protection
transfer
cable for the
monitoring
signals

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
PMU.
l One end
connects
to the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.

l The
other is
an RJ45
connecto
r.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
EXT_A
LM0
port on
the
UPEU in
the
BBU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
COM_O
UT port
on the
PMU.
l One end
connects
to the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
EXT_A
LM0
port on
the
UPEU in
the BBU.

307

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S9

Cable

GPS clock
signal cable

APM30H (Ver.B)

APM30H (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

l One end
is an
SMA
male
connecto
r.

l One end
connects
to the
GPS port
on the
USCU in
the
BBU.

l One end
is an
SMA
male
connecto
r.

l One end
connects
to the
GPS port
on the
USCU in
the BBU.

l The
other
end is an
N-type
female
connecto
r.

S10

CMUEBBU
monitoring
signal cable

l The
other
end
connects
to a GPS
surge
protector
.
-

l The
other
end is an
N-type
female
connecto
r.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to a GPS
surge
protector
.

l One end
connects
to the
COM_I
N port on
the fan
assembly
in the
APM30
H.

To be
replaced

l The
other end
connects
to the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU in
the BBU.

3.6.2 Replacing the Front Door


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door. The front doors
of the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures for removing
the front doors of the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

308

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needlenose pliers.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn off the fan in the front door.
If...

Then...

An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
APM30H assembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
(Ver.B) is
used
A
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker controls
TMC11H power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
(Ver.B) is
used
An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
APM30H assembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
(Ver.C) is
used
A
Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breaker controls
TMC11H power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
(Ver.C) is
used
Step 3 Remove the front door to be replaced.
1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Remove the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door from the transfer box, as
shown in Figure 3-24.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

309

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-24 Removing the connector from the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the
front door

2.

Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown
in Figure 3-25.
Figure 3-25 Removing the equipotential cable for the door of the cabinet

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two hinges from the front door, and remove the
front door, as shown in Figure 3-26.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

310

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-26 Removing the front door

Step 4 Install the new front door.


NOTE

l When installing the front door, use new removable pins.


l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the front door before delivery.

1.

Install the new front door and insert the removable pins.

2.

Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on an inner wall.

Step 5 Replace an N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever.


1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Remove the two M4 screws on the left N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever
and pull out the door support lever from the right N-shaped fixing bracket. Then move the
left N-shaped fixing bracket to the right part of the door support lever and remove the left
N-shaped fixing bracket, as shown in the following figure.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

311

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-27 Remove an N-shaped fixing bracket

2.

Take out and slide a new N-shaped fixing bracket onto the right part of the door support
lever and move it to the left part of the lever. Use two M4 screws to secure the new Nshaped fixing bracket, with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), and place the right part of
the door support lever in its original position, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-28 Install a new N-shaped fixing bracket

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

312

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the number on
the barcode label starts from 212102, as shown by 1 in Figure 3-29.
If...

Then...

There is a barcode label in the indicated


position

Proceed with the next step.

There is no barcode label in the indicated


position

Record the barcode (shown by 2 in Figure


3-29) on the front door, and stick a barcode
label carrying the same barcode to the
indicated position.

Figure 3-29 Positions of the barcode labels

(1) Position of the barcode label on an inner wall of the (2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of the
cabinet
cabinet

Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.6.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The fan
assemblies in the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures
for removing the fan assemblies from the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
flat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

313

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Optional: Remove the power cable for the fan assembly to power off the fan assembly. Skip
this step if this cable has been disconnected during the replacement of the front door.
If...

Then...

An APM30H
(Ver.B) is used

Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
assembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.

A TMC11H
(Ver.B) is used

Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker
controls power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.

An APM30H
(Ver.C) is used

Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
assembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.

A TMC11H
(Ver.C) is used

Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breaker
controls power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.

Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.


1.

Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fan
assembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as
shown in Figure 3-30.
NOTE

The procedure for removing a fan assembly from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H
(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) are the same. Figure 3-30 uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

314

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-30 Removing the fan assembly

DANGER
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan
assembly.
Step 4 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position and tighten
the four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in
Figure 3-31. The recommended torque is 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
NOTE

When installing the new fan assembly, ensure that the air exhaust vent of the fan assembly is on the top.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

315

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-31 Installing the new fan assembly

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.6.4 Replacing the ELU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit
(ELU).

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-32.
Figure 3-32 Position of the ELU

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

316

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1.

Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.

2.

Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,
as shown in Figure 3-33.
Figure 3-33 Opening the housing of the ELU

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown in
Figure 3-34.
Figure 3-34 Removing the ELU

Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.


Step 4 Install a new ELU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

317

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

NOTE

l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure
3-35. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 3-6.

Figure 3-35 Position of the barcode label

(1) Barcode label on the ELU

(2) BOM code

Table 3-6 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets


Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed base


station

l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macro


base station

l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission


equipment

l Ver.B: 02113830

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 and


uses the -48 V DC power supply

l Ver.B: 02113827

RFC (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113818

l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195

l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393

l Ver.C: 02113398

l Ver.C: 02113395

l Ver.C: 02113390
IBBS200D (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397

1.

Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. The
recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

2.

Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.

3.

Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

318

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic label
information of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplate
in the upgrade package.
l

If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.

If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.6.5 Replacing the Power System


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power system.

Prerequisites
Before replacing the power system, ensure that the entire base station has been powered off.

Context
l

Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.

The procedure for replacing the power system of the APM30H (Ver.B) and APM30H
(Ver.C) is the same. The figures in this section uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.

Figure 3-36 shows component changes in the AC/DC power system.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

319

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Figure 3-36 Component changes in the AC/DC power system

(1) PMU 01B

(2) PSU
(3) EPS 01
(EPW30-48A) subrack

(4) PSU
(PSU4850A)

(5) EPU03A
subrack

(6) PMU 11A

(8) EPU05A
subrack

(7) PSU
(R4850G2)

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove cables from the EPS or EPU.
1.

Disconnect the ground cable for the EPS or EPU from the ground bar on the inner left wall
of the cabinet.

2.

Loosen the two captive screws on the metal protective cover on the left side of the EPS or
EPU, and then remove the protective cover.

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the plastic protective covers from the AC input and
output wiring terminal blocks on the left side of the EPS or EPU.

4.

Record the connections of the AC input power cable and AC output power cable, and then
remove the cables.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

320

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

5.

Reinstall the two plastic protective covers, and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the M4
screws to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).

6.

Record the connections of the DC power cables on the EPS or EPU panel, and then remove
the DC power cables.

7.

Record the connections of the DC power cables that are connected to the power cables on
the right side of the EPS or EPU, and then remove the DC power cables.

Step 3 Remove the PMU and all PSUs from the EPS or EPU.

NOTICE
The original EPS or EPU contains one PMU and three PSUs and therefore is heavy. You are
advised to remove the PMU and PSUs before removing the EPS or EPU.
1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of each
PSU.

2.

Pull the handle slightly to slide each PSU out of the subrack and remove each PSU from
the subrack, as shown in Figure 3-37.
Figure 3-37 Removing the PSUs

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from the handle on the panel of the
PMU.

4.

Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU out of the subrack and remove the PMU from the
subrack, as shown in Figure 3-38.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

321

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-38 Removing the PMU

Step 4 Remove the plate for the power series 120 connector from the right side of the EPS or EPU, as
shown in Figure 3-39.
Figure 3-39 Removing the plate for the power series 120 connector

Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the remaining seven screws from both sides of the EPS or
EPU, and remove the EPS or EPU from the cabinet along the guide rails slowly, as shown in
Figure 3-40.

NOTICE
The EPS or EPU subrack is heavy. Therefore, you need to hold the subrack with one hand and
support the bottom with the other hand to slowly pull the subrack out of the cabinet. This prevents
the subrack from falling and ensures personal safety.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

322

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-40 Removing the EPS or EPU

Step 6 Remove the metal support from the left side of the EPS or EPU.
1.

Loosen the two captive screws on the cover plate of the metal support.

2.

Remove the two screws from the metal support and remove the metal support, as shown in
Figure 3-41.
Figure 3-41 Removing the metal support

Step 7 Place the removed EPS or EPU subrack, PSUs, PMU, and metal support into an ESD box or
bag.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

323

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 8 Optional: Install the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of
the cabinet. Only an APM30H (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an APM30H
(Ver.C) is used, skip this step.

CAUTION
If a guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will
increase by 2C to 3C at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report
overtemperature alarms if the environmental temperature is high.
1.

Remove the guide rails on the left side of the position where the EPS or EPU is originally
installed, as shown by a in Figure 3-42. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the screws.

2.

Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mounting
bar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton padding
contacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in Figure 3-42.

3.

Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 8.1 to secure the guide rails and tighten the screws
to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as shown by c in Step 8.1.

Figure 3-42 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left
side of the cabinet

Step 9 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet. If there are
other modules installed at the bottom of the cabinet, skip this step.
1.

Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton
padding for about 30 mm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in Figure 3-43.

2.

Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completely
strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of the
cabinet, as shown by b and c in Figure 3-43.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

324

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-43 Installing windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet

Step 10 Install the windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet, as shown in Figure
3-44.

CAUTION
If a guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will
increase by 2C to 3C at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report
overtemperature alarms if the environmental temperature is high.
1.

Remove the M6 screw at the bottom of the right mounting bar.

2.

Place the windproof cotton padding next to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use two M6
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

325

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-44 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the cabinet

Step 11 Install a new EPU.


1.

Place the new EPU on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the power system
into the cabinet.

2.

Use a torque screwdriver to tighten the seven panel screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.) and one
hex screw to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.) so that the EPU subrack is secured.

3.

Use M6x12 screws to secure the ground cable for the new EPU to the ground bar. The
recommended torque is 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).

----End

3.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and Bias-Tee


This section describes the procedure and precautions for removing the GATM and Bias-Tee.

Prerequisites
l

The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. When
DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced.

If the BTS3900A has two GATMs, remove the upper one before the lower one.

Procedure
Step 1 Power off the GATM. The following table lists the terminals that can be used by a GATM power
cable, which may differ from the actually used terminal.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

326

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

If...

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Then...

An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATM
APM30H power cable from the LOAD4 port on the EPS.
(Ver.B) is
used
If an
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the GATM
APM30H power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPU.
(Ver.C) is
used
Step 2 Remove the GATM.
1.

Remove the monitoring signal cable from the GATM panel.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the ground cable for the GATM. Then use a wrench
to remove the RF jumper from the GATM.

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four M6 screws from the GATM, remove the
GATM, and secure the removed screws on their original positions on the mounting bar, as
shown in Figure 3-45.
NOTE

The method of removing the GATM from an APM30H (Ver.B) is the same as the method of removing it
from an APM30H (Ver.C). The following figure uses an APM30H (Ver.B) as an example.

Figure 3-45 Removing the GATM

Step 3 Remove the Bias-Tee.


1.

Use a wrench to remove the jumper, feeder, signal cable and PGND cable.

2.

Remove the Bias-Tee.

3.

Use a wrench to connect the jumper and the feeder to 25 Nm to 35 Nm (221.25 lbfin. to
309.75 lbfin.), as shown in Figure 3-46.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

327

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-46 Connecting the jumper and the feeder

(1) Feeder

(2) Jumper

----End

3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the APM30H cabinet
after you restructure the APM30H.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context
Table 3-7 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 3-7 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the APM30H

EPC4
connector

LOAD2 port
on the EPU

3V3
connector

PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the APM30H

A 1.1 m (3.61
ft) cable is
newly
delivered.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

328

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Connector
at One End

Input power
cable for the
junction box

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

OT terminals M4 ground
(M4)
screw as
well as L1,
and N1
terminals
near the AC
OUTPUT
silkscreen on
the EPU in
the
APM30H

OT terminals

L and N
terminals in
the junction
box

To be reused

EMUA
power cable

EPC4
connector

LOAD5 port
on the EPU

Cord end
terminals

PWR1 port
on the
EMUA

To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.

BBU power
cable

EPC4
connector

LOAD0 or
LOAD6 port
on the EPU

3V3
connector

-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU

A cable is
newly
delivered.

Table 3-8 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.


Table 3-8 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installation
Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor
in the
APM30H

2-pin
connector

GATE port
on the PMU

Bare wire

Door status
sensor

To be reused

ELU signal
cable

RJ45
connector

ELU

RJ45
connector

ELU port in
the CMUEA

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
for the fan in
the front
door

Interconnect
ion terminal

Power cable
for the fan in
the front door
of the
APM30H

4-pin
connector

FAN_EXT
port on the
fan assembly

A cable is
newly
delivered.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

329

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installation
Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA

RJ45
connector

MON1 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU

A 1.1 m
(3.61 ft)
cable is
newly
delivered.

Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
PMU

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the fan
assembly of
the APM30H

A 1.1 m
(3.61 ft)
cable is
newly
delivered.

EMUA
monitoring
signal cable

DB9 male
connector

RS-485 port
on the
EMUA

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
PMU

To be reused

Procedure
l

Remove related cables in the cabinet.


Remove the related cables listed in Table 3-7 and Table 3-8. If the cables have been
removed during the module replacement, skip this step.

Install power cables in the APM30H.


1.

2.

3.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the APM30H, as shown by P1 in Figure
3-47.
a.

Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD2 port on the panel of the EPU.

b.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD2 port
on the EPU.

c.

Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the fan assembly in the APM30H, and use a torque wrench to tighten the screws
on the 3V3 connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).

Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-47.


a.

Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For detailed operations, see
Assembling the Cord End Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the
EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b.

Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD5 port on the panel of the EPU.

c.

Connect the one end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD5
port on the EPU.

d.

Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 port
on the EMUA.

Install input power cable for the junction box, as shown by P3 in Figure 3-47.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

330

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4.

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

a.

Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L1 and N1
terminals near the AC OUTPUT silkscreen on the EPU, and tighten the terminals
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

b.

Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals (M4) to the L and
N terminals in the junction box, and tighten the terminals to 1.2 Nm (10.62
lbfin.).

Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P4 in Figure 3-47.


a.

Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the
instructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4
connector must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

b.

Remove the EPC4 connector from the LOAD0 or LOAD1 port on the panel of
the EPU.

c.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD0 or
LOAD1 port on the EPU.

d.

Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on the
UPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54
lbfin.).

Figure 3-47 Installing power cables in the APM30H

5.

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind the cable.

6.

Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

Install signal cables in the APM30H.


1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 3-48.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

331

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

a.

Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on the
top of the ELU.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU port
on the fan assembly.

Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure
3-48.
a.

Connect one end of the signal cable to the GATE port on the PMU.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable to the door status sensor.

Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door, as shown by S3 in
Figure 3-48.
a.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door to
its transfer terminal.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable with a 4-pin connector to the FAN_EXT
port on the fan assembly.

Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S4 in Figure 3-48.


a.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the
COM_IN port on the CMUEA.

b.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to
the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

Install the PMU-CMUEA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 3-48.


a.

Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUT
port on the CMUEA.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_IN
port on the PMU.

Optional: Install the monitoring signal cable for the EMUA, as shown by S6 in Figure
3-48.
a.

Connect the end of the signal cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS485 port
on the EMUA, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).

b.

Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUT
port on the PMU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

332

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-48 Installing signal cables in the APM30H

7.

Optional: Install the surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals.
a.

Connect one end of the cable to the OUT0 port on the USLP2 in slot 3 of the
SLPU.

b.

Connect the other end of the cable to the EXT_ALM0 port on the UPEU in the
BBU.

c.

Connect the other three surge protection transfer cables, as shown in Figure
3-49.

Figure 3-49 Connections of surge protection transfer cables for the monitoring signals

8.

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind the cable.

9.

Label the installed cables according to Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

333

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

3.7 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11H
cabinet to be restructured.

3.7.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the


TMC11H Cabinet
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and added
during the restructuring of the TMC11H cabinet.

Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Components in the TMC11H


Cabinet
There are two types of TMC11Hs:
l

One type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration A in


Figure 3-50.

The other type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as
shown in illustration B in Figure 3-50.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

334

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-50 Exterior and configurations of the TMC11H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Remarks

Fan
assembly

To be
replace
d

The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance the


heat dissipation capacity.

SLPU

To be
reused

ELU

To be
replace
d

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needs


to be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.

DCDU-03
C

To be
replace
d

It needs to be replaced with the DCDU-12B or


DCDU-12C.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

335

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Remarks

BBU3900

To be
reused

Door status
sensor

To be
reused

Environme
nt
monitoring
unit type A
(EMUA)

To be
reused

AC heater

To be
reused

Front door

To be
replace
d

The heat exchanger in the cabinet needs to be replaced


to enhance the heat dissipation capacity of the cabinet.

10

Junction
box

To be
reused

11

DCDU-11
B, or
DCDU-11
C

To be
replace
d

It needs to be replaced with the DCDU-12B or


DCDU-12C.

Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring Cables in the TMC11H


Cabinet
Figure 3-51 shows the power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses
the BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power.
Figure 3-51 Power cables and equipotential cables in the TMC11H cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

336

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

P1

P2

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Power
cable for
the fan
assembly in
the
TMC11H

BBU power
cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installatio
n Position

Connecto
r

Installatio
n Position

l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD8
port on
the
DCDU03C.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD9
port on
the
DCDU12C.

l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
TMC11
H.

l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
TMC11
H.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD6
port on
the
DCDU03C.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
-48V
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.

l The
other
end is a
3V3
connect
or.

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD6
or
LOAD7
port on
the
DCDU11C.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

To be
replaced

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
-48V
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.

337

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

P3

P4

Cable

EMUA
power
cable

Equipotenti
al cable for
grounding
of the front
door

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installatio
n Position

Connecto
r

Installatio
n Position

l One end
is toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD7
port on
the
DCDU03C.

l One end
is toolless
female
connect
or
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connect
s to the
LOAD8
port on
the
DCDU11C.

l The
other
end is
cord
end
terminal
s.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.

l The
other
end is
cord
end
terminal
s.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
PWR1
port on
the
EMUA.

Both ends
are OT
terminals.

l One end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the front
door.

Both ends
are OT
terminals.

l One end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the front
door.

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of
the
cabinet.

Change
Type

They can be
used
continuousl
y and their
connectors
need to be
replaced
onsite.

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connect
s to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of
the
cabinet.

Figure 3-52 shows the signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet that houses the BBU3900 and is
supplied with -48 V DC power.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

338

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-52 Signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet

No.

S1

Cable

Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the door
status
sensor

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

l One
end is a
2-pin
connec
tor.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GATE
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

l One
end is a
2-pin
connec
tor.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GATE
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

l The
other
end is
bare
wires.

l The
other
end is
bare
wires.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
door
status
sensor.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

To be
reused

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
door
status
sensor.

339

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S2

Cable

CMUABBU
monitorin
g signal
cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
IN port
on the
fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

Change
Type

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

340

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S3

Cable

ELU
signal
cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

To be
reused

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
ELU.

341

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S4

Cable

Monitorin
g signal
cable for
the fan in
the front
door

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors
.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
FAN_
EXT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

Both ends
are 4-pin
connectors
.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
FAN_
EXT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
transfe
r box in
the
front
door of
the
TMC1
1H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

To be
replaced

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
transfe
r box in
the
front
door of
the
TMC1
1H.

342

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S5

Cable

EMUA
monitorin
g signal
cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

l One
end is a
DB9
male
connec
tor.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
OUT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly.

l One
end is a
DB9
male
connec
tor.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
OUT
port on
the fan
assemb
ly.

l The
other is
an
RJ45
connec
tor.

l The
other is
an
RJ45
connec
tor.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
RS-48
5 port
on the
EMUA
.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

To be
reused

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
RS-48
5 port
on the
EMUA
.

343

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S6

Cable

Surge
protection
transfer
cable for
the
monitorin
g signals

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
OUT0
port on
the
USLP2
in the
SLPU.

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
EXT_
ALM0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
S7

GPS clock
signal
cable

l One
end is
an
SMA
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end is
an Ntype
female
connec
tor.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GPS
port on
the
USCU
in the
BBU.
l The
other
end
connec
ts to a
GPS
surge
protect
or.

Change
Type

To be
reused

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
EXT_
ALM0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.
l One
end is
an
SMA
male
connec
tor.
l The
other
end is
an Ntype
female
connec
tor.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
GPS
port on
the
USCU
in the
BBU.

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connec
ts to a
GPS
surge
protect
or.
344

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S8

Cable

CMUEBBU
monitorin
g signal
cable

TMC11H(Ver.B)

TMC11H(Ver.C)

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors
.

l One
end
connec
ts to
the
COM_
IN port
on the
fan
assemb
ly in
the
TMC1
1H.

Change
Type

To be
replaced

l The
other
end
connec
ts to
the
MON0
port on
the
UPEU
in the
BBU.

3.7.2 Replacing the Front Door


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door. The front doors
of the APM30H and TMC11H have the same structure. Therefore, the procedures for removing
the front doors of the APM30H and TMC11H are the same.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needlenose pliers.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

345

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Turn off the fan in the front door.
If...

Then...

An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
APM30H assembly power cable from the LOAD0 port on the EPS.
(Ver.B) is
used
A
Turn off the SW8 circuit breaker on the DCDU-03C. This circuit breaker controls
TMC11H power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
(Ver.B) is
used
An
Remove the tool-less female connector (pressfit type) at one end of the fan
APM30H assembly power cable from the LOAD5 port on the EPU.
(Ver.C) is
used
A
Turn off the SW9 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11C. This circuit breaker controls
TMC11H power supply to the fan in the front door and the fan assembly.
(Ver.C) is
used
Step 3 Remove the front door to be replaced.
1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Remove the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door from the transfer box, as
shown in Figure 3-53.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

346

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-53 Removing the connector from the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the
front door

2.

Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown
in Figure 3-54.
Figure 3-54 Removing the equipotential cable for the door of the cabinet

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two hinges from the front door, and remove the
front door, as shown in Figure 3-55.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

347

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-55 Removing the front door

Step 4 Install the new front door.


NOTE

l When installing the front door, use new removable pins.


l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the front door before delivery.

1.

Install the new front door and insert the removable pins.

2.

Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on an inner wall.

Step 5 Replace an N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever.


1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Remove the two M4 screws on the left N-shaped fixing bracket of the door support lever
and pull out the door support lever from the right N-shaped fixing bracket. Then move the
left N-shaped fixing bracket to the right part of the door support lever and remove the left
N-shaped fixing bracket, as shown in the following figure.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

348

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-56 Remove an N-shaped fixing bracket

2.

Take out and slide a new N-shaped fixing bracket onto the right part of the door support
lever and move it to the left part of the lever. Use two M4 screws to secure the new Nshaped fixing bracket, with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.), and place the right part of
the door support lever in its original position, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-57 Install a new N-shaped fixing bracket

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

349

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 6 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and the number on
the barcode label starts from 212102, as shown by 1 in Figure 3-58.
If...

Then...

There is a barcode label in the indicated


position

Proceed with the next step.

There is no barcode label in the indicated


position

Record the barcode (shown by 2 in Figure


3-58) on the front door, and stick a barcode
label carrying the same barcode to the
indicated position.

Figure 3-58 Positions of the barcode labels

(1) Position of the barcode label on an inner wall of the (2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of the
cabinet
cabinet

Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.7.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
flat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

350

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 (Optional) Turn off the circuit breaker LOAD8 on the DCDU-03C. Skip this step if the fan
assembly has been powered off during replacement of the front door.
Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.
1.

Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two screws from each mounting ear of the fan
assembly, and then pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as
shown in Figure 3-59.
NOTE

The procedure for removing a fan assembly from the APM30H (Ver.B), APM30H (Ver.C), TMC11H
(Ver.B), and TMC11H (Ver.C) are the same. Figure 3-59 uses an APM30H (Ver.C) as an example.

Figure 3-59 Removing the fan assembly

DANGER
When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan
assembly.
Step 4 Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

351

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 5 Install a new fan assembly. Slide the new fan assembly into the installation position and tighten
the four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears on both sides of the fan assembly, as shown in
Figure 3-60. The recommended torque is 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
NOTE

When installing the new fan assembly, ensure that the air exhaust vent of the fan assembly is on the top.

Figure 3-60 Installing the new fan assembly

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.7.4 Replacing the ELU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit
(ELU).

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the APM30H or TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-61.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

352

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-61 Position of the ELU

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1.

Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.

2.

Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,
as shown in Figure 3-62.
Figure 3-62 Opening the housing of the ELU

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown in
Figure 3-63.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

353

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-63 Removing the ELU

Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.


Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE

l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure
3-64. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 3-9.

Figure 3-64 Position of the barcode label

(1) Barcode label on the ELU

(2) BOM code

Table 3-9 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed base


station

l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macro


base station

l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission


equipment

l Ver.B: 02113830

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 and


uses the -48 V DC power supply

l Ver.B: 02113827

l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195

l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393

l Ver.C: 02113398

l Ver.C: 02113395

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

354

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

RFC (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390
l Ver.B: 02113819

IBBS200D (Ver.B)

l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480


l Ver.B: 02113820

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

l Ver.C: 02113397

1.

Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. The
recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

2.

Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.

3.

Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.

Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic label
information of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplate
in the upgrade package.
l

If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.

If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.7.5 Replacing the DCDU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDUs in an TMC11H.
These DCDUs include the DCDU-03B, DCDU-03C, DCDU-11B, and DCDU-11C.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
The following table helps you determine whether a DCDU needs to be replaced with a
DCDU-12B or DCDU-12C.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cabinet

Base Station

Application
Scenarios

DCDU Model
Before
Replacement

DCDU Model
After
Replacement

TMC11H
(Ver.B)

DBS3900

It provides
transmission
space.

DCDU-03C

DCDU-12C

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

355

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cabinet

Base Station

BTS3900A

TMC11H
(Ver.C)

DBS3900

BTS3900A

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Application
Scenarios

DCDU Model
Before
Replacement

DCDU Model
After
Replacement

It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.

DCDU-03B

DCDU-12B

It provides
transmission
space.

DCDU-03C

DCDU-12C

It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.

DCDU-03C

DCDU-12C

It provides
transmission
space.

DCDU-11C

DCDU-12C

It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.

DCDU-11B

DCDU-12B

It provides
transmission
space.

DCDU-11C

DCDU-12C

It houses the
BBU3900 and is
supplied with
-48 V DC
power.

DCDU-11C

DCDU-12C

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

356

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 2 Power off the DCDU according to the following table.


If...

Then...

A DCDU-03B or DCDU-11B needs to be


powered off

Switch off the external power supply.

A DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C in a TMC11H


Turn off the TMC circuit breaker on the
needs to be powered off, and the TMC11H only EPS in the APM30H.
provides transmission space
At a BTS3900A site, a DCDU-03C in a
TMC11H needs to be powered off, and the
TMC11H houses BBU3900 and is supplied
with -48 V DC power

Turn off the SPARE2 circuit breaker on the


DCDU-01 in the RFC.

A DCDU-11C in a TMC11H needs to be


Switch off the external power supply.
powered off, and the TMC11H houses
BBU3900 and is supplied with -48 V DC power
At a DBS3900 site, a DCDU-03C or DCDU-11C Switch off the external power supply.
in a TMC11H needs to be powered off, and the
TMC11H houses BBU3900 and is supplied
with -48 V DC power
Step 3 Remove the DCDU.
1.

Remove all cable connectors from the DCDU.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal
block from the DCDU, as shown in Figure 3-65.

3.

Record the connection of the input power cables, and then remove the power cables.

4.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from both sides of the DCDU, and
pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as shown in Figure 3-66.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

357

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-65 Removing the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block from the
DCDU

Figure 3-66 Removing the DCDU

Step 4 Place the removed DCDU and protective covers in an ESD box or bag.
Step 5 Install a new DCDU-12B.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

358

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

1.

Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands, and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on both sides of the DCDU-12B contact the columns.

2.

Tighten the four M6 screws on both sides of the DCDU-12B to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the TMC11H cabinet
after restructuring the TMC11H cabinet.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context
Table 3-10 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.
Table 3-10 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Descriptio
n

Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the TMC11H

EPC4
connector

LOAD9 port
on the
DCDU-12C

3V3
connector

PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the TMC11H

The cable is
newly
delivered.

BBU power
cable

EPC4
connector

LOAD6 or
LOAD7 port
on the
DCDU-12C
in the
TMC11H

3V3
connector

-48V port on
the UPEU in
the BBU of
the TMC11H

The cable is
newly
delivered.

EMUA
power cable

EPC4
connector

LOAD8 port
on the
DCDU-12C

Cord end
terminals

PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA

To be reused.
The
connector at
one end
needs to be
replaced.

Table 3-11 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

359

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 3-11 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet


Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Descriptio
n

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor

Bare wire

GATE port
on the fan
assembly

Bare wire

Door status
sensor

Reused

CMUABBU
monitoring
signal cable

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU

The cable is
newly
delivered. It
is 1.1 m (3.61
ft) long.

ELU signal
cable

RJ45
connector

ELU

RJ45
connector

ELU port on
the fan
assembly

Reused

Monitoring
signal
transfer
cable for the
fan in the
front door

Interconnecti
on terminal

Power cable
for the fan in
the front
door of the
TMC11H
cabinet

4-pin
connector

FAN_EXT
port on the
fan assembly

Newly
delivered
cable

EMUA
monitoring
signal cable

DB9 male
connector

RS485 port
on the
EMUA

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
fan assembly

Reused

Procedure
l

Install power cables in the TMC11H cabinet.


1.

2.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the TMC11H cabinet, as shown by P1
in Figure 3-67.
a.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD9 port
on the DCDU-12C.

b.

Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54
lbfin.).

Optional: Install the BBU power cable, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-67. If a BBU is
not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.
a.

Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the
instructions in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 or
LOAD7 port on the DCDU-12C.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

360

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

c.

3.

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the -48V port on the
UPEU in the BBU, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54
lbfin.).

Install the EMUA power cable, as shown by P3 in Figure 3-67.


a.

Replace the OT terminals at one end of the EMUA power cable with an EPC4
connector, as described in Table 3-10. For details about how to replace the
terminals, see Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.

b.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD8 port
on the DCDU-12C.

c.

Connect the end of the power cable with cord end terminals to the PWR1 port
on the EMUA.

Figure 3-67 Installing power cables in the TMC11H cabinet

4.

Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use
cable ties to bind the cables.

5.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

Install signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet.


1.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor to the GATE
port on the fan assembly, as shown by S1 in Figure 3-68.

2.

Optional: Install the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable, as shown by S2 in


Figure 3-68. If a BBU is not installed in the cabinet, skip this step.

3.

a.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the
COM_IN port on the CMUEA.

b.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable with an RJ45 connector to
the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU.

Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S3 in Figure 3-68.


a.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on the
top of the ELU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

361

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

b.
4.

5.

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU port
on the fan assembly.

Install the monitoring signal cable for the fan assembly in the front door, as shown by
S4 in Figure 3-68.
a.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door to
its transfer terminal.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable with a 4-pin connector to the FAN_EXT
port on the fan assembly.

Install the EMUA monitoring signal cable, as shown by S5 in Figure 3-68.


a.

Connect the end of the signal cable with a DB9 male connector to the RS485 port
on the EMUA, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54 lbfin.).

b.

Connect the end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the COM_OUT
port on the CMUEA.

Figure 3-68 Installing signal cables in the TMC11H cabinet

6.

Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use
cable ties to bind the cables.

7.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

3.8 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet


This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFC
cabinet to be restructured.

3.8.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the RFC


This section describes the cable and component changes during the restructuring of the RFC.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

362

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Component Changes in the RFC


Figure 3-69 shows component changes in the RFC.
Figure 3-69 Components in the RFC

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

DCDU-01

To be
replace
d

The DCDU-01 needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A to


enhance the power distribution capability.

ELU

To be
replace
d

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needs


to be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.

Door status
sensor

Reused

FAN 01A

To be
replace
d

The FAN 01A needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C to


enhance the heat dissipation capability.

RFU

To be
replace
d

The original RFUs are replaced by new RFUs with


enhanced capacities.

DCDU-11
A

To be
replace
d

The DCDU-11A needs to be replaced by a DCDU-12A


to enhance the power distribution capability.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

363

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

FAN 01B

To be
replace
d

The FAN 01B needs to be replaced by a FAN 01C to


enhance the heat dissipation capability.

DC
Junction
Box

l The DC junction box in an RFC (Ver.B) uses one or


two DC power inputs and provides two DC power
outputs.
l The original DC junction box will be used in the RFC
(Ver.C).

Cable Changes in the RFC


Figure 3-70 shows the power cable changes in the RFC.
Figure 3-70 Power cables in the RFC

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

364

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
0

DCDU-1
1A
power
cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

RFC (Ver.B)

RFC (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals on the
DCDU-11A.

Cha
nge
Typ
e
Reu
sed

l The other end


connects to the
DC junction
box.
P
1

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Power
cable for
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC

l One end
is a
parallel
terminal.
l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l One end
connects
to the
FAN port
on the
DCDU-0
1.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).

l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects to the
LOAD6 port on
the
DCDU-11A.

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
PWR port on
the fan
assembly in the
RFC.

365

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Cable

P
2
to
P
7

RFU
power
cables

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

RFC (Ver.B)

RFC (Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

l One end
is a
parallel
terminal.

l One end
connects
to one of
the RFU0
to RFU5
ports on
the
DCDU-0
1.

l One end
is a toolless
female
connector
(pressfit
type).

l One end
connects to one
of the LOAD0
to LOAD5
ports on the
DCDU-11A in
the RFC.

l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l The other end


connects to the
PWR port on an
RRU among
RFU 0 to RFU
5.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.

l The other
end is a
3V3
connector
.

l The other
end
connects
to the
PWR port
on an
RRU
among
RFU 0 to
RFU 5.
P
8

Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.
l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.

Cha
nge
Typ
e
To
be
repl
aced

Reu
sed

l The other end


connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.

Figure 3-71 shows the signal cable changes in the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

366

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-71 Signal cable changes in the RFC

No.

S1

Cable

RFC (Ver.B)

Monitoring
Signal
Cable for
the Door
Status
Sensor

RFC (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are bare
wires.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.

Both ends
are bare
wires.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

367

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S2

Cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

RFC (Ver.B)

ELU signal
cable

RFC (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU.
S3

Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
RFC

l One end
is a 4-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is a
temperat
ure
sensor.

l One end
connects
to the
TEM
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.
l The
other
end is
bound
nearby
the air
intake
vent at
the
bottom
of the
RFC.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU.
l One end
is a 4-pin
connecto
r.
l The
other
end is a
temperat
ure
sensor.

l One end
connects
to the
TEM
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

Reused

l The
other end
is bound
nearby
the air
intake
vent at
the
bottom
of the
RFC.

3.8.2 Replacing the Fan Assembly


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly. The
procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C) is the same as the procedure for
replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

368

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Power off the fan assembly.
If...

Then...

An RFC (Ver.B) Turn off the FAN circuit breaker on the DCDU-01.
is used
An RFC (Ver.C) Turn off the SW6 circuit breaker on the DCDU-11A.
is used
Step 3 Remove the original fan assembly.
1.

Record all cable connections on the panel of the fan assembly.

2.

Remove all the cables from the front panel of the fan assembly.

3.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears on both sides
of the fan assembly, and pull the box out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as
shown in Figure 3-72.
NOTE

The procedure for replacing a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.B) is the same as the procedure for replacing
a fan assembly in an RFC (Ver.C). Figure 3-72 uses an RFC (Ver.C) as an example.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

369

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-72 Removing the fan assembly

4.

Place the removed fan assembly into an ESD box or bag.

Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten
the four screws on the mounting ears on both sides to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).
Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.8.3 Replacing the ELU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit
(ELU).

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
The ELU is on the inner right side of the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-73.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

370

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-73 Position of the ELU

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1.

Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.

2.

Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,
as shown in Figure 3-74.
Figure 3-74 Opening the housing of the ELU

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown in
Figure 3-75.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

371

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-75 Removing the ELU

Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.


Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE

l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure
3-76. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 3-12.

Figure 3-76 Position of the barcode label

(1) Barcode label on the ELU

(2) BOM code

Table 3-12 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed base


station

l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macro


base station

l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission


equipment

l Ver.B: 02113830

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 and


uses the -48 V DC power supply

l Ver.B: 02113827

l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195

l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393

l Ver.C: 02113398

l Ver.C: 02113395

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

372

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

RFC (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390

IBBS200D (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397

1.

Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. The
recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

2.

Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.

3.

Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.

Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic label
information of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplate
in the upgrade package.
l

If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.

If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.8.4 Replacing the DCDU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the DCDU-01 or DCDU-11A
in an RFC.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
As shown by Figure 3-77, a DCDU-01 is located in the top 1 U space of an RFC (Ver.B). The
DCDU-11A in an RFC (Ver.C) is in the same position as the DCDU-01.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

373

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-77 Position of the DCDU-01

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, wear an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD
gloves, to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.
Step 2 Switch off all DC output circuit breakers on the DCDU to power off the fan assembly and RFUs.
Step 3 Power off the DCDU.
If...

Then...

An RFC (Ver.B) Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPS.
is installed in an
AC power
supply scenario
An RFC (Ver.B) Switch off the external power supply.
is installed in a
DC power
supply scenario
An RFC (Ver.C) Turn off the RFC1 or RFC2 circuit breaker on the EPU.
is installed in an
AC power
supply scenario

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

374

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

If...

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Then...

An RFC (Ver.C) Switch off the external power supply.


is installed in a
DC power
supply scenario
Step 4 Remove the old DCDU.
1.

Record the positions of all connectors on the DCDU, and remove the connectors.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal
block from the DCDU, as shown in Figure 3-78.

3.

Record the connection of the input power cables, and then remove the power cables.

4.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from both sides of the DCDU, and
pull the DCDU out of the cabinet along the guide rails gently, as shown in Figure 3-79.
NOTE

The procedure for removing a DCDU-01 is the same as that for removing a DCDU-11A. Figure 3-78 and Figure
3-79 use a DCDU-11A as an example.

Figure 3-78 Removing the protective cover for the DC input wiring terminal block from the
DCDU

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

375

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-79 Removing the DCDU

Step 5 Place the removed DCDU and protective covers in an ESD box or bag.
Step 6 Install a new DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 3-81.
1.

Stick a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A, as shown in Figure 3-80.
Figure 3-80 Sticking a cable claw onto the right side of the DCDU-12A

(1) Double-sided tape

2.

Place the new DCDU-12A on the guide rails of the installation position and slide the
DCDU-12A into the cabinet.

3.

Tighten the two screws on each side of the DCDU-12A to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

376

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-81 Installing the DCDU-12A

(1) DCDU-12A

(2) Cable claw

Step 7 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.8.5 Replacing the RFU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the RFU.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a torque wrench, an ESD wrist strap or a pair
of ESD gloves, a Phillips screwdriver, an ESD box or bag, and dustfree cloth.

Context
l

RFUs are divided into the DRFU, GRFU V1, GRFU V2, GRFU V2a, MRFU V1, MRFU
V2, MRFU V2a, WRFU, and LRFU.

If the replaced MRFU V2 (P900M) is not faulty, disable its maximum output power locking
for TX channels before storing it in the spare parts inventory.

Replacing an RFU interrupts services carried by the RFU.

Replacing an RFU takes about 6 to 10 minutes.

The GATM and Bias-Tee are configured in a cabinet that is configured with DRFUs. When
DRFUs are removed, the GATM and Bias-Tee also need to be replaced. For details about
how to remove the GATM and Bias-Tee, see 3.6.6 (Optional) Removing the GATM and
Bias-Tee.

A handle is used during the replacement. The handle is placed on the lower left side of the
document holder on the cabinet door, as shown in Figure 3-82.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

377

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-82 Position of the handle

NOTE

The handle is only for pulling an RFU outwards horizontally.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
NOTE

Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to prevent
electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or other electronic components.

Step 2 Remove the RFU to be replaced.


1.

Turn off the corresponding DC output power switch on the DCDU panel to power off the
RFU.

2.

Label the power cable for the RFU to be replaced, and disconnect the cable.

3.

Label the RF jumper for the RFU to be replaced, loosen the DIN 7/16 male elbow connector
on the RF jumper, and disconnect the RF jumper.

4.

Label the CPRI electrical cable connected to the RFU, and disconnect the fiber.

5.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws at the four corners of the RFU, and then
pull the RFU handle to move the RFU outwards 50 mm (1.97 in.) to 100 mm (3.94 in.), as
shown in Figure 3-83. Hold the RFU with one hand, and remove the RFU from the cabinet
with the other hand.

CAUTION
The RFU is heavy. Therefore, handle it with caution.
6.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Place the handle in its original position.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

378

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-83 Removing the RFU

Step 3 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC, as shown in
Figure 3-84. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is
used, skip this step.
1.

Strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton padding, and adhere the windproof cotton
padding to the position of "1" in Figure 3-84.

2.

Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the
RFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure
3-84, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.

3.

Strip all pieces of windproof cotton padding left on the cabinet wall after removing the
windproof cotton padding.

Figure 3-84 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the RFC

(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom right
side of the RFC

Step 4 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC, as shown in Figure
3-85. Only an RFC (Ver.B) requires windproof cotton padding. If an RFC (Ver.C) is used, skip
this step.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

379

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

1.

Strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton padding, and adhere the windproof cotton
padding to the position of "1" in Figure 3-85.

2.

Use a utility knife to divide the windproof cotton padding on the bottom left side of the
RFC into two parts. Retain the windproof cotton padding on the position of "2" in Figure
3-85, and remove the rest windproof cotton padding.

3.

Strip all pieces of windproof cotton padding left on the cabinet wall after removing the
windproof cotton padding.
Figure 3-85 Installing windproof cotton padding on the inner left wall of the RFC

(1) Windproof cotton padding to be installed (2) Windproof cotton padding to be retained on the bottom
left side of the RFC

Step 5 Install the new RFU.


1.

Place the new RFU on guide rails, and slide it along the rails until it snaps into place.

2.

Tighten the M4 screws at the four corners of the RFU panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.) to
secure the RFU to the subrack.

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction Box


The DC junction box in an RFC converts one or two DC power inputs into two DC power outputs.
Skip this section if an RFC (Ver.C) is used, which has already been configured with a DC junction
box.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

In AC scenarios, the RFC power terminals in the EPU are connected to the DCDU-12A,
which then distributes DC power to the RFC, the DC junction box is not configured.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

380

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

In DC scenarios, the external power supply is directly connected to the DC junction box,
which then distributes DC power to the RFC and TMC.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the DC junction box, as shown in Figure 3-86.
1.

Remove the screw from the protective cover for the DC junction box and then remove
protective cover.

2.

Remove the two screws from the DC junction box and then remove the DC junction box.
Figure 3-86 Removing the DC junction box

Step 3 Install the DC junction box in the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-87.
1.

Remove the two M6 screws from the left wall of the RFC.

2.

Align the two holes on the right side of the installation plate with the two holes left in Step
3.1, and secure them with the two removed M6 screws to 2 Nm (17.7 lbfin.).

3.

Place the DC junction box on the installation plate, and secure them with two M4 screws
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

381

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-87 Installing the DC junction box

NOTE

It is recommended that the protective cover be reinstalled after all required cables are connected to the DC
junction box.

----End

3.8.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables in the RFC cabinet
after you restructure the RFC.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context
Table 3-13 describes the power cables in the restructured cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

382

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-13 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Descriptio
n

Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the RFC

EPC4
connector

LOAD6 port
on the
DCDU-12A

3V3
connector

PWR port on
the fan
assembly in
the RFC

The cable is
newly
delivered. It
is 1.1 m (3.61
ft) long.

Input power
cable from
the DC
junction box
to the
DCDU-12A
in the RFC

OT terminal
(M6)

DC junction
box in the
RFC

OT terminals DCDU-12A
in the RFC

l A 0.3 m
(0.98 ft)
cable
with a
blue wire
and a
black
wire is
newly
delivered
for an
RFC
(Ver.B).
l The
original
cable is
used in an
RFC
(Ver.C).
The
newly
delivered
cable can
be
disposed
of.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

383

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Descriptio
n

RFU power
cables

EPC4
connector

One of
LOAD0 to
LOAD5
ports on the
DCDU-12A

3V3
connector

PWR port on
one of RFU 0
to RFU 5

Six RFU
power cables
are newly
delivered.
Power cables
for RFU 0 to
RFU 2 are
1.5 m (4.92
ft) and power
cables for
RFU 3 to
RFU 5 are
1.1 m (3.61
ft).

Table 3-14 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.


Table 3-14 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Descriptio
n

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor

Bare wire

GATE port
on the fan
assembly

Bare wire

Door status
sensor

Reused

ELU signal
cable

RJ45
connector

ELU port on
the fan
assembly

RJ45
connector

ELU

Reused

Monitoring
signal cable
for the
temperature
sensor in the
RFC

4-pin
connector

TEM port on
the fan
assembly in
the RFC

Temperature
sensor

Air intake
vent at the
bottom of an
RFC

Reused

Procedure
l

Install power cables in the RFC.


1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Install the power cable for the fan assembly in the RFC, as shown by P1 in Figure
3-88.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

384

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2.

3.

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

a.

Connect the end of the power cable with an EPC4 connector to the LOAD6 port
on the DCDU-12A.

b.

Connect the end of the power cable with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the fan assembly, and tighten the screws on the connector to 0.4 Nm (3.54
lbfin.).

Optional: Install the input power cable for the RFC (from the DC junction box to the
DCDU-12A), as shown by P2 in Figure 3-88. If the cabinet is an RFC (Ver.B) in an
AC power supply scenario, skip this step.
a.

Optional: Connect one end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN(+)
and NEG(-) terminals in the DC junction box on an inner wall of the RFC, and
tighten the terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.). In an RFC (Ver.C), one end of
the power cable has been connected to the DC junction box. Therefore, skip this
step for an RFC (Ver.C).

b.

Connect the other end of the power cable with OT terminals to the RTN+ and
NEG- terminals on the DCDU-12A, and tighten the terminals to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).

Install the RFU power cables, as shown by P3 to P8 in Figure 3-88.


a.

Connect the end of the power cables with an EPC4 connector to one of the
LOAD0 to LOAD5 ports on the DCDU-12A.

b.

Connect the end of the power cables with a 3V3 connector to the PWR port on
the corresponding RFU, and tighten the screws on the connectors to 0.4 Nm
(3.54 lbfin.).

Figure 3-88 Installing power cables in the RFC

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

385

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

4.

Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use
cable ties to bind the cables.

5.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

Install signal cables in the RFC.


1.

Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 3-89.


a.

Connect one end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the port on the
top of the ELU.

b.

Connect the other end of the signal cable with an RJ45 connector to the ELU port
on the fan assembly in the RFC.

2.

Connect one end of the door status monitoring signal cable with bare wires to the
GATE port on the fan assembly, as shown by S2 in Figure 3-89.

3.

Install the monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor in the RFC, as shown
by S3 in Figure 3-89.
a.

Connect one end of the monitoring signal cable to the temperature sensor near
the air intake vent at the bottom of the RFC.

b.

Connect the 4-pin connector at the other end of the monitoring signal cable to
the TEM port on the fan assembly in the RFC.

Figure 3-89 Installing signal cables in the RFC

4.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Route the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements, and then use
cable ties to bind the cables.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

386

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

5.

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

3.9 Restructuring the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.

3.9.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the


IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet
This section describes the changes to be made on the components and cables in an IBBS200D
or IBBS200T cabinet to be restructured.

Component Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet


The component changes in the IBBS200D cabinet are the same as those in the IBBS200T cabinet.
This section uses the IBBS200D as an example. Figure 3-90 shows component changes in the
IBBS200D cabinet.
Figure 3-90 Components in the IBBS200D cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

ELU

To be
replace
d

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needs


to be replaced to facilitate troubleshooting.

Storage
battery

Reused

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

387

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

Door status
sensor

Reused

Power
distribution
box

To be
replace
d

The power distribution box needs to be replaced to


enhance the power backup capacity.

Junction
terminal for
the input
power
cable of the
heating
film

Reused

Battery
temperatur
e sensor

Reused

Cable Changes in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T Cabinet


Figure 3-91 shows the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the IBBS200T.
Figure 3-91 Equipotential cable and power cables in the battery cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

388

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

P
1

P
2

Cable

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T


(Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

Power
transfer
cable for
the fan or
TEC in
the front
door

l One end
is a 3V3
connector
.

l One end
connects
to the
CMUA.

l One end
is a 3V3
connector
.

l One end
connects to the
PWR port on
the CMUE.

l The other
end is an
OT
terminal.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.

l The other
end is an
OT
terminal.

l The other end


connects to the
power
distribution
box.

RTN(+)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.

NEG(-)
cable for
the upper
storage
batteries

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

To
be
repl
aced

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
power
distribution
box.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
3

Cha
nge
Typ
e

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
power
distribution
box.

389

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

P
4

Cable

RTN(+)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries

IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T


(Ver.C)

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installation
Position

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.

NEG(-)
cable for
the lower
storage
batteries

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
storage
batteries.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

Equipote
ntial
cable for
the front
door

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l One end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the front
door.

Both ends are


OT
terminals.

l The other
end
connects
to the
ground
point on
the
bottom
left of the
cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l One end
connects to the
storage
batteries.

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
power
distribution
box.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
6

To
be
repl
aced

l The other end


connects to the
power
distribution
box.

l The other
end
connects
to the
power
distributi
on box.
P
5

Cha
nge
Typ
e

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l One end
connects to the
ground point on
the front door.
l The other end
connects to the
ground point on
the bottom left
of the cabinet.

To
be
reus
ed
(repl
ace
men
t of
the
term
inals
not
requ
ired)

390

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-92 shows signal cable changes in the cabinet.


Figure 3-92 Signal cable changes in the battery cabinet

No.

S1

Cable

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status
sensor

IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or
IBBS200T (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are bare
wires.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RF
cabinet
(RFC).

Both ends
are bare
wires.

l One end
connects
to the
GATE
port on
the fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
door
status
sensor.

391

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

S2

Cable

ELU signal
cable

IBBS200D (Ver.B) or
IBBS200T (Ver.B)

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or
IBBS200T (Ver.C)

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU
port on
the fan
assembl
y in the
RFC.

Both ends
are RJ45
connectors.

l One end
connects
to the
ELU port
on the
fan
assembly
in the
RFC.

l The
other
end
connects
to the
ELU.

Change
Type

Reused

l The
other end
connects
to the
ELU.

3.9.2 Replacing the Power Distribution Box


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power distribution box
in the battery cabinet.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

DANGER
When replacing batteries, prevent short circuits or reverse connections between the positive and
negative poles of the storage batteries. All tools used for installation must be insulated to prevent
the batteries from burning and to ensure personal safety.

Context
Before replacing the power distribution box, remove all storage batteries from the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

392

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Power off the battery cabinet.
If...

Then...

An IBBS200D (Ver.B) or IBBS200T


(Ver.B) is used

1. Remove the tool-less female connector


(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on the
EPS.
2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker on
the EPS.
3. Turn off the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1
circuit breakers on the power distribution
box.
4. Turn off the BAT circuit breaker on the EPS.

IBBS200D (Ver.C) or IBBS200T (Ver.C) 1. Remove the tool-less female connector


(pressfit type) from the LOAD3 port on the
EPU.
2. Turn off the AC OUTPUT circuit breaker on
the EPU.
3. Turn off the BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1
circuit breakers on the power distribution
box.
4. Turn off the FAN/TEC_SW2 circuit breaker
on the power distribution box.
Step 3 Remove the storage batteries.
1.

Remove the terminal covers from the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 3-93.
Figure 3-93 Removing the terminal covers from the storage batteries

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

393

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2.

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Use temporary labels to mark the input power cables for the positive and negative poles on
the storage batteries and the serial connection copper bars between the storage batteries,
and remove the input power cables and copper bars, as shown in Figure 3-94.
Figure 3-94 Removing the power cables for storage batteries

3.

Reinstall the terminal covers on the poles of the storage batteries.

4.

Hold the slings on the storage batteries and pull the storage batteries out. Then use both
hands to remove the storage batteries at the same layer, and place the storage batteries in
a safe position.
NOTE

l Remove the baffle plate and storage batteries layer by layer from top down. After removing the
baffle plate at one layer, you must remove all storage batteries at this layer before removing the
baffle plate at the lower layer.
l Use both hands to hold each storage battery to avoid falling.
l When placing the storage batteries outdoors, do not expose them to the sunlight.

Step 4 Remove the storage battery power cables and power transfer cable for the TEC or fan in the
front door from the power distribution box.
Step 5 Remove the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 3-95.
1.

Remove the two screws from the left cover plate of the power distribution box and remove
the cover plate.

2.

Remove the four screws from the interior of the power distribution box.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

394

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-95 Removing the power distribution box

3.

Take the power distribution box out and use insulation tape to wrap the OT terminals on
the cables connected to the power distribution box.

4.

Place the power distribution box into an ESD box or bag.

Step 6 Install rubber protective caps onto the screws for the earthquake-proof support on the top of the
battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-96.
Figure 3-96 Installing rubber protective caps

(1) Screws for the earthquake-proof support

(2) Rubber protective caps

Step 7 Install cables in the power distribution box.


Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

395

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

1.

Remove the cover plate from the new power distribution box.

2.

Install cables in the power distribution box, as shown in Figure 3-97.


Figure 3-97 Installing cables in the power distribution box

(1) NEG(-) cable for the (2) RTN(+) cable for the (3) NEG(-) cable for the (4) RTN(+) cable for the
upper storage batteries upper storage batteries lower storage batteries lower storage batteries
NOTE

The power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the battery cabinet has been connected
to the new power distribution box before delivery.

Step 8 Install the power distribution box in the battery cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-98.
1.

Place the new power distribution box in the battery cabinet.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four M4x8 screws in the power distribution box
to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

3.

Install the cover plate on the left side of the power distribution box and tighten the two
M3x6 screws on the cover plate to 0.55 Nm (4.87 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

396

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-98 Installing the power distribution box

----End

3.9.3 Replacing the ELU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the electronic label unit
(ELU).

Prerequisites
l

The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves,
a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
There is an ELU on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet, as shown in
Figure 3-99.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

397

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-99 Position of the ELU in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinet

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Remove the ELU.
1.

Remove the RJ45 connector and cable from the top of the ELU.

2.

Push the housing of the faulty ELU upwards according to the arrow direction on the housing,
as shown in Figure 3-100.
Figure 3-100 Opening the housing of the ELU

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M4x8 screws from the ELU, as shown in
Figure 3-101.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

398

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-101 Removing the ELU

Step 3 Place the ELU in the ESD box or bag.


Step 4 Install a new ELU.
NOTE

l Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.
l Distinguish the old and new ELUs. There is a barcode label on each new ELU, as shown in Figure
3-102. The BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets are listed in Table 3-15.

Figure 3-102 Position of the barcode label

(1) Barcode label on the ELU

(2) BOM code

Table 3-15 BOM codes on the ELUs in different cabinets

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in distributed base


station

l Ver.B: 02113825,02113826

APM30H (Ver.B) applied in separated macro


base station

l Ver.B: 02113828, 02113829

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses only transmission


equipment

l Ver.B: 02113830

TMC11H (Ver.B) houses the BBU3900 and


uses the -48 V DC power supply

l Ver.B: 02113827

l Ver.C: 01071193,01071195

l Ver.C: 02113389, 02113401, 02113393

l Ver.C: 02113398

l Ver.C: 02113395

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

399

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Cabinet Type

BOM Code on the ELU

RFC (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113818
l Ver.C: 02113390

IBBS200D (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113819
l Ver.C: 02113396, 02113480

IBBS200T (Ver.B)

l Ver.B: 02113820
l Ver.C: 02113397

1.

Place the new ELU at the installation position and use two M4x8 screws to secure it. The
recommended torque is 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

2.

Reinstall the RJ45 connector removed in Step 2.1 to the port on the top of the ELU.

3.

Reinstall the housing on the new ELU.

Step 5 Ask the element management system (EMS) administrator to query the electronic label
information of the cabinet. Then check whether the information is consistent with the nameplate
in the upgrade package.
l

If the information is consistent, the ELU has been successfully installed.

If the information is inconsistent, the ELU has not been installed successfully. In this case,
locate the cause and reinstall the ELU.

Step 6 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

3.9.4 Installing Storage Batteries and Cables in the Battery Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing storage batteries and cables
in the battery cabinet after you restructure the battery cabinet.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver,
and a pair of ESD gloves.

Context
Table 3-16 describes the power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

400

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-16 Power cables and equipotential cables in the restructured cabinet
Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

Power
transfer
cable for the
TEC or fan in
the front
door

3V3
connector

PWR port on
the CMUEA

OT terminals Power
(M4, 2.5
Distribution
Box
mm2 or
2
0.004 in. )

Delivered
with the
power
distribution
box

RTN(+)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries

OT terminal

Storage
battery

OT terminal

Power
Distribution
Box

The cable is
newly
delivered.

NEG(-)
cable for the
upper
storage
batteries

OT terminal

Storage
battery

OT terminal

Power
Distribution
Box

The cable is
newly
delivered.

RTN(+)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries

OT terminal

Storage
battery

OT terminal

Power
Distribution
Box

The cable is
newly
delivered.

NEG(-)
cable for the
lower
storage
batteries

OT terminal

Storage
battery

OT terminal

Power
Distribution
Box

The cable is
newly
delivered.

Table 3-17 describes the signal cables in the restructured cabinet.


Table 3-17 Signal cables in the restructured cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

ELU signal
cable

RJ45
connector

ELU port in
the CMUEA

RJ45
connector

ELU

To be reused

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

401

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Cable

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Remarks

Monitoring
signal cable
for the door
status sensor

Bare wire

GATE port
on the
CMUEA

Bare wire

Door status
sensor

To be reused

Procedure
l

Install storage batteries and power cables in the battery cabinet.


1.

Install the power transfer cable for the TEC or fans in the front door of the cabinet, as
shown by P1 in Figure 3-103.

2.

Place power cables for the storage batteries. The NEG(-) cables are black and RTN
(+) cables are red. P2 and P3 in Figure 3-103 show the routing of these power cables.
Figure 3-103 Installing copper bars and power cables in the battery cabinet

3.

Install the storage batteries from bottom to top and from left to right, as shown in
Figure 3-104.
NOTE

The battery cell should be installed along the guide rails so that certain spacing is reserved
between battery cells.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

402

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-104 Installing the storage batteries

4.

Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown in Figure 3-105.
a.

Remove terminal covers from the storage batteries.

b.

Install copper bars between the poles of neighboring batteries for series
connections.

c.

Install the NEG(-) cables and then RTN(+) cables for the storage batteries, and
tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).

Figure 3-105 Installing copper bars and power cables in the battery cabinet

5.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind the cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

403

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

6.
l

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

Install signal cables in the battery cabinet.


1.

2.

Install the ELU signal cable, as shown by S1 in Figure 3-106.


a.

Connect the ELU signal cable to the port on the ELU.

b.

Connect the RJ45 connector at the other end of the ELU signal cable to the ELU
port on the CMUEA.

Install the monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, as shown by S2 in Figure
3-106.
a.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the door status sensor.

b.

Connect the other end of the monitoring signal cable to the GATE port on the
CMUEA.

Figure 3-106 Installing signal cables in the battery cabinet

3.

Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable
ties to bind the cable.

4.

Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.

----End

3.10 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables


This chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting the
modules to external devices.

3.10.1 Installing the BBU Case


This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing an optional BBU case in an
APM30H or TMC11H.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

404

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and a torque screwdriver.

Context
Two BBUs are configured for a triple-mode station, the BBUs are installed as follows:
l

During the capacity expansion, if there is space for a second BBU in the APM30H, the
BBU is installed in the APM30H. Otherwise, the BBU is installed in a TMC11H.

When a second BBU is installed in the APM30H, it is recommended that the second BBU
be installed right above or below the original BBU without removing the guide rails.

Figure 3-107 shows the position for installing the BBU case in the APM30H and TMC11H.
Figure 3-107 Position for installing the BBU case

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Remove the filler module from the position where the BBU case is to be installed, as
shown in Figure 3-108. If no filler module is installed in this position, skip this step.
1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the two M6 screws from the mounting ear on each
side of the filler module.

2.

Slide the filler module out of the cabinet.


NOTE

Install removed filler modules in the vacant slots in the lower part of the cabinet from top to bottom. Redundant
filler modules can be discarded.

Figure 3-108 Removing the filler module

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

405

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 2 Record the ESN on the BBU case and report it to the base station commissioning personnel. For
details, see Obtaining the ESN.
Step 3 Install cable claws on the BBU, as shown in Figure 3-109.
1.

Align the two cable claws with the holes on either side of the BBU case.

2.

Use two M4 screws to secure each cable claw with a torque of 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

Figure 3-109 Installing cable claws on the BBU

Step 4 Install the BBU case, as shown in Figure 3-110.


1.

Place the BBU on the guide rails and slowly slide the BBU into the cabinet.

2.

Tighten the two M6 screws on the mounting ears on either side of the BBU to 2 Nm (17.70
lbfin.).

Figure 3-110 Installing the BBU case

Step 5 Install the BBU power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-111.
1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructions
in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

406

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector
must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

2.

Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.

3.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD6 port on the
EPU in the APM30H.

CAUTION
When installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connect
the BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the EPU. Operations in the reverse sequence
may cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
NOTE

Figure 3-111 shows the BBU case installed in an APM30H. When the BBU case is installed in a TMC11H, the
cable connections are the same.

Figure 3-111 Installing the BBU power cable in AC scenarios

Step 6 Install the BBU power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-112.
1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Add an EPC4 connector to one end of the BBU power cable according to the instructions
in Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

407

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

NOTE

A 3V3 connector has been added to one end of the BBU power cable before delivery. An EPC4 connector
must be added to the other end of the cable onsite.

2.

Connect the 3V3 connector at one end of the power cable to the PWR port on the UPEU.

3.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the power cable to the LOAD8 port on the
DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.

CAUTION
When installing the BBU power cable for an BBU that is added to a running base station, connect
the BBU power cable first to the BBU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequence
may cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.
NOTE

Figure 3-112 shows the BBU case installed in the basic TMC11H. When the BBU case is installed in an extension
TMC11H, the cable connections are the same.

Figure 3-112 Installing the BBU power cable in DC scenarios

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

408

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 7 Install inter-BBU signal cables. For details, see 3.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal
Cables.
Step 8 Install the transmission cables. For details, see 3.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables.
----End

3.10.2 Installing the BBU Components


This section describes how to install the boards into the BBU and SLPU.

Context
NOTE

This chapter only describes the procedure for installing components in the BBU. For details about the slots
where the BBU components are installed, see the BBU configuration information.

CAUTION
Take correct ESD prevention measures, such as wearing an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, to
avoid static damage to boards, modules, and electronic components.

Operation Rules
l

When moving a board, hold the board with both hands, as shown in Figure 3-113.
Figure 3-113 Incorrect and correct operations for moving a board

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

When installing a board, hold the front panel with one hand and support the edge of the
board with the other hand to insert it into the slot. Do not use only one hand to hold the
board or apply pressure to the edge of the board. Figure 3-114 shows correct and incorrect
operations.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

409

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-114 Incorrect and correct operations for supporting a board for installation

When inserting a board into a slot, keep the board on the same plane as the slot. Do not
bend the board or insert it at an angle. Figure 3-115 shows correct and incorrect operations.
Figure 3-115 Incorrect and correct operations for inserting a board

CAUTION
l Exercise cautions when holding and placing boards to avoid collision or scratches. Do not
stack or deform boards after they are unpacked.
l When inserting a board, ensure that it does not collide with the subrack and is properly
installed.

Installing the boards into the BBU


Figure 3-116 uses the WMPT and UPEU as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the
BBU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

410

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

1.

Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the filler
panels from the slots.

2.

If there are ejector levers on the panel, raise them.

3.

Gently slide the board into the slot.

4.

If there are ejector levers on the panel, close them.

5.

Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).

Figure 3-116 Installing the boards into the BBU

Installing the boards into the SLPU


Figure 3-117 uses the UELP as examples to illustrate how to install boards in the SLPU.
1.

Loosen the screws on the filler panels in the installation slots, and then remove the filler
panels from the slots.

2.

Gently slide the board into the slot.

3.

Tighten the captive screws on both sides of the panel to 0.6 Nm (5.31 lbfin.).

Figure 3-117 Installing the boards into the SLPU

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

411

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

3.10.3 (Optional) Installing the DCDU-12B


This section describes the procedures and precautions for installing the DCDU-12B.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Context
When RFUs and RRUs are configured in the BTS3900A, a DCDU-12B must be installed in the
RFC to supply power to RRUs.
Figure 3-118 shows the position of the DCDU-12B in the RFC.
Figure 3-118 Position of the DCDU-12B

Table 3-18 lists the specifications of DCDU-12B power cables in AC and DC scenarios.
Table 3-18 Specifications of DCDU-12B power cables
Cable

DCDU12B
input
power
cable
(in AC

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

RT
N
(+)

Col
or

CrossSectional
Area of
the Cable

One End

The Other End

Connec
tor

Installation
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Bla
ck

25 mm2 or
0.039 in2,
one group

OT
terminal
(M6)

RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals in
the INPUT
part of the
DCDU-12B in
the RFC

OT
terminal
(M6)

RFC2
terminal on
the EPU in
the
APM30H

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

412

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Col
or

scenari
os)

NE
G
(-)

Blu
e

DCDU12B
input
power
cable
(in DC
scenari
os)

RT
N
(+)

Bla
ck

NE
G
(-)

Blu
e

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

CrossSectional
Area of
the Cable

One End

The Other End

Connec
tor

Installation
Position

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

l 35
mm2 or
0.054
in.2
(low
smoke
zero
halogen
), one
group

OT
terminal
(M6)

RTN(+) and
NEG(-)
terminals in
the INPUT
part of the
DCDU-12B in
the RFC

Depending
on the
external
equipment

External
power
equipment

l 16
mm2 or
0.025
in2, two
groups

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B.
Step 2 Install the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 3-119.
1.

Hold the DCDU-12B with both hands and slide it into the cabinet until the mounting ears
on the DCDU-12B contact the columns.

2.

Tighten the two M6 screws on each side of the DCDU-12B to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as
shown in Figure 3-119.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

413

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-119 Installing the DCDU-12B

(1) DCDU-12B

(2) Cable claw

Step 3 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in AC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-120. Skip this
step in DC scenarios.
1.

Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For details, see Assembling the OT
Terminal and the Power Cable.

2.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal RFC2
on the EPU in the APM30H.

3.

Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input wiring
terminals on the DCDU-12B. Then reinstall the protective cover.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

414

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-120 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in AC scenarios

Step 4 Install the DCDU-12B input power cable in DC scenarios, as shown in Figure 3-121.
1.

Add a connector to each end of the power cable. For how to add a connector to the power
cable on the DCDU-12B side, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable. The
type of the connector at the other end depends on the onsite conditions.

2.

Connect the connector at the other end of the power cable to external power equipment.

3.

Remove the protective cover from the terminal block for the DC input power cable of the
DCDU-12B. Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the DC input wiring
terminals on the DCDU-12B. Then reinstall the protective cover.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

415

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-121 Installing the DCDU-12B power cable in DC scenarios

Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cables.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End

3.10.4 Installing the Air Baffle


In an APM30H (Ver.B) or TMC11H (Ver.B), air baffle must be installed in the vacant customer
space to prevent heat reflux in the empty space. If the vacant space in an APM30H(Ver.C)/
TMC11H(Ver.C) has been occupied by air baffle, skip this section.

Procedure
Step 1 Place the air baffle in the installation position, and secure the air baffle to the right inner wall of
the cabinet, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

416

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-122 Installing the filler module

----End

3.11 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets


This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinets
during the upgrade.

3.11.1 Changes of Cables Between Cabinets of BTS3900A(Ver.B)


This section describes the changes of power cables, PGND cables, equipotential cables,
transmission cables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables between cabinets during
the upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_B).

Power Cables, PGND Cables, and Equipotential Cables


Table 3-19 lists the changes of power cables, PGND cables, and equipotential cables.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

417

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 3-19 Changes of power cables, PGND cables, and Equipotential cables
Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Input
power
cable
for the
APM3
0H (in
AC
scenar
ios)

To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

OT
termin
al
(M6)

AC
INPU
T port
on the
EPS

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment

Exter
nal
power
equip
ment

OT
termin
al
(M6)

AC
INPU
T port
on the
EPU

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment

Extern
al
power
equip
ment

Input
power
cable
for the
TMC1
1H (in
AC
scenar
ios)

To be
reuse
d, and
the
conne
ctor at
one
end
needs
to be
replac
ed
onsite
.

Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)

TMC
port on
the
EPS

OT
termin
al
(M6, 4
mm2
or
0.006
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-03
C

EPC4
connec
tor

LOAD
7 port
on the
EPU

OT
termin
al (M6,
4 mm2
or
0.006
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-12C

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

418

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Power
cable
for the
juncti
on box
in the
TMC1
1H

To be
reuse
d

OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L3 and
N3
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
APM3
0H

OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L and
N
termi
nals
near
the
AC
OUT
PUT
part
on the
juncti
on
box in
the
TMC
11H

OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L3 and
N3
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
APM3
0H

OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L and
N
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
junctio
n box
in the
TMC1
1H

Input
power
cable
for the
TMC1
1H
(when
the
TMC1
1H
uses
DC
power
suppli
ed by
the
RFC
cabine
t)

To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

Paralle
l
termin
al

SPAR
E2
port on
the
DCD
U-01

OT
termin
al
(M6,
2.5
mm2
or
0.004
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-03
C

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Juncti
on box
in the
RFC

OT
termin
al (M6,
25
mm2
or
0.039
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-12C

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

419

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in DC
scenar
ios)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment

OT
termin
al
(M6,
16
mm2
or
0.025
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-01

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
power
equip
ment

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
equip
ment

OT
termin
al (M6,
one
group
of
cables
with a
crosssection
al area
of 35
mm2
or
0.054
in2, or
two
groups
of
cables
with a
crosssection
al area
of 16
mm2
or
0.025
in2)

Juncti
on box
in the
RFC

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

420

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Input
power
cable
for the
RFC
(in AC
scenar
ios)

To be
replac
ed

Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(blue)

Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(blue)
on the
EPS

OT
termin
al

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
INPU
T part
on the
DCD
U-01

OT
termin
al
(M6)

RFC1
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H

OT
termin
al

DCD
U-12A
in the
RFC

RRU
power
cable

To be
reuse
d(1)

Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)

One of
LOAD
8 to
LOAD
13
ports
on the
EPS

Depen
ding
on the
RRU
port

EPC5
or
EPC4
connec
tor

One of
LOAD
0 to
LOAD
8 ports
on the
DCD
U-12B

Depen
ding
on the
RRU
port

PWR
port on
the
RRU

Input
power
cable
for the
heater
(in AC
scenar
ios)

To be
reuse
d

OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L1 and
N1
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
EPS

C13
connec
tor

Heate
r/
power
input
port

OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L1 and
N1
termin
als
near
the AC
OUTP
UT
part on
the
EPS

C13
connec
tor

Heater
/power
input
port

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

421

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Power
cables
for a
batter
y
cabine
t

To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(grey)

Power
series
120
conne
ctor
(grey)
on the
EPS

OT
termin
al
(M6,
16
mm2
or
0.025
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
on the
BAT
in the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200D
or
IBBS
200T

OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)

BAT
termin
al on
the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H

OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termin
als on
the
BAT
in the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T

Power
cables
for the
fan in
an
IBBS2
00D

To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)

LOAD
3 port
on the
EPS in
the
APM3
0H

OT
termin
al
(M4,
2.5
mm2
or
0.004
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
on the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200D

EPC4
connec
tor

LOAD
8 port
on the
EPU
in the
APM3
0H

EPC4
connec
tor

FAN/
TEC_I
NPUT
port on
the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00D

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

422

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Chan
ge
Type

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Power
cable
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS2
00D

To be
reuse
d

OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L1 and
N1
termin
als or
L2 and
N2
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box

OT
termin
al
(M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L and
N
termi
nals
on the
juncti
on
box
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS
200D

OT
termin
al (M8,
35
mm2
or 0.05
in.2)

L1 and
N1
termin
als or
L2 and
N2
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box

OT
termin
al (M4,
1.5
mm2
or
0.002
in.2)

L and
N
termin
als on
the
junctio
n box
for the
heatin
g film
in the
IBBS2
00D

Power
cable
for the
TEC
in the
IBBS2
00T

To be
replac
ed (a
new
cable
needs
to be
prepa
red
onsite
)

Toolless
female
conne
ctor
(pressf
it type)

LOAD
3 port
on the
EPS

OT
termin
al
(M4,
2.5
mm2
or
0.004
in.2)

RTN
(+)
and
NEG
(-)
termi
nals
near
the
FAN
silksc
reen
on the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS
200T

EPC4
connec
tor

LOAD
8 port
on the
EPU

EPC4
connec
tor

FAN/
TEC_I
NPUT
port on
the
power
distrib
ution
box in
the
IBBS2
00T

Equip
otentia
l cable

To be
reuse
d

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabin
et

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
in the
upper
cabine
t

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
in the
lower
cabine
t

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

423

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

PGND
cable

Chan
ge
Type

To be
reuse
d

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Insta
llatio
n
Posit
ion

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
for the
cabine
t

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d
busba
r
outsid
e the
cabin
et

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d bar
for the
cabine
t

OT
termin
al
(M6)

Groun
d
busbar
outsid
e the
cabine
t

NOTE

(1) The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length requirements
of the new RRU.

Signal Cables
Table 3-20 lists the signal cable changes.
Table 3-20 Signal cable changes
Cable

Monitor
ing
signal
cable
between
cascade
d
CMUE
As

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

To
be
reus
ed

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
OUT
port on
the
upperlevel
CMU
A

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
IN
port on
the
lowerlevel
CMU
A

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
OUT
port on
the
upperlevel
CMU
EA

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
IN
port on
the
lowerlevel
CMU
EA

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

424

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Monitor
ing
signal
cable
for a
battery
cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

To
be
reus
ed

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
IN
port on
the
CMU
A in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
485
port on
the
PMU

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
IN
port on
the
CMU
EA in
the
IBBS2
00D or
IBBS2
00T

RJ45
conne
ctor

COM_
485
port on
the
PMU

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

425

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

CMUA
-BBU
monitor
ing
signal
cable

Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

To
be
reus
ed

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Before the Change


Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

RJ45
conne
ctor

l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UA
in
the
RF
C

RJ45
conne
ctor

l M
ON
0
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H

RJ45
conne
ctor

l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UE
A
in
the
RF
C

RJ45
conne
ctor

l M
ON
0
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
RF
C

l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UA
in
the
AP
M3
0H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

After the Change

l M
ON
1
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l CO
M_
IN
por
t on
the
C
M
UE
A
in
the
AP
M3
0H

l M
ON
1
por
t on
the
UP
EU
in
the
BB
U
in
the
AP
M3
0H

426

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

BBU
intercon
nection
cable

Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

To
be
reus
ed

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

DLC
conne
ctor

One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU

DLC
conne
ctor

l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U

DLC
conne
ctor

One of
the M0
to M4
ports
on the
UCIU
in the
BBU

DLC
conne
ctor

l CI
por
t on
the
U
MP
T
in
the
BB
U

l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

l S0
por
t on
the
UC
IU
in
the
BB
U

BBU
alarm
cable

To
be
reus
ed

RJ45
conne
ctor

EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU

RJ45
conne
ctor

Extern
al
alarm
device

RJ45
conne
ctor

EXT_
ALM0
or
EXT_
ALM1
port on
the
UPEU
or
UEIU
in the
BBU

RJ45
conne
ctor

Extern
al
alarm
device

Cable
between
two
combin
ed base
stations

To
be
reus
ed

DB15
male
conne
ctor

GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU

MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor

DGLU
b on
the
DCTB

DB15
male
conne
ctor

GCK
port on
the
UCIU
in the
BBU

MD36
or
DB15
male
conne
ctor

DGLU
b on
the
DCTB

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

427

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Ch
ang
e
Ty
pe

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Before the Change

After the Change

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at
One
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Conn
ector
at the
Other
End

Instal
lation
Positi
on

Externa
l dry
contact
monitor
ing
signal
cable

To
be
reus
ed

Bare
wire

SLPU

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment

Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment

Bare
wire

SLPU

Depen
ding
on the
extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment

Extern
al
transm
ission
equip
ment

Adapter
used for
local
mainten
ance

To
be
reus
ed

USB
3.0
conne
ctor

USB
port on
the
UMPT
in the
BBU

Ethern
et
conne
ctor

Ethern
et
cable

USB
3.0
conne
ctor

USB
port on
the
UMPT
in the
BBU

Ethern
et
conne
ctor

Ethern
et
cable

Transmission Cables and CPRI Electrical Cables


Table 3-21 lists the changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables.
Table 3-21 Changes of transmission cables and CPRI cables

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Chang
e Type

Connector at
One End

Installation
Position

Connector at
the Other End

Installation
Position

E1/T1
cable

To be
reused

DB26 male
connector

OUTSIDE port
on the UELP in
the SLPU

Depending on
the external
transmission
equipment

External
transmission
equipment

FE/GE
Etherne
t cables

To be
reused

RJ45 connector FE electrical


port in the
OUTSIDE part
on the UFLP in
the SLPU

RJ45 connector

Router that is
connected to
the BSC

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

428

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Cable

Chang
e Type

Connector at
One End

Installation
Position

Connector at
the Other End

Installation
Position

FE/GE
fiber
optic
cable

To be
reused

LC connector

l FE optical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT,
UMPT, or
UTRP in
the BBU

l FC
connector

Router that is
connected to
the BSC

l SC
connector
l LC
connector

l FE optical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
E1/T1
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable

To be
reused

DB25
connector

INSIDE port
on the UELP in
the SLPU

FE/GE
surge
protecti
on
transfer
cable

To be
reused

RJ45 connector l FE
electrical
port on the
GTMU,
WMPT, or
UMPT in
the BBU

DB26
connector

E1/T1 port on
the GTMU,
WMPT,
UMPT, or
UTRP in the
BBU

RJ45 connector

FE electrical
port in the
INSIDE part on
the UFLP in the
SLPU

LC connector

FE optical port
on the WMPT/
UMPT, LMPT/
UMPT, or
GTMU in the
BBU

l FE
electrical
port on the
LMPT or
UMPT in
the BBU
Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
optical
ports

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

To be
reused

LC connector

FE optical port
on the GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

429

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Cable

Chang
e Type

Connector at
One End

Installation
Position

Interco
nnectio
n cable
betwee
n FE
electric
al ports

To be
reused

RJ45 connector FE electrical


port on the
GTMU,
WMPT/
UMPT, or
LMPT/UMPT
in the BBU

CPRI
electric
al
cables

To be
reused

SFP20 male
connector

l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
GTMU in
the BBU

Connector at
the Other End

Installation
Position

RJ45 connector

FE electrical
port on the
WMPT/UMPT,
LMPT/UMPT,
or GTMU in the
BBU

SFP20 male
connector

l CPRI0 or
CPRI1 port
on one of
MRFU 0 to
MRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
GRFU 0 to
GRFU 5

l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5 (or
CPRI0 to
CPRI2)
ports on the
WBBP in
the BBU

l CPRI0 port
on one of
WRFU 0 to
WRFU 5
l CPRI0 port
on one of
LRFU 0 to
LRFU 5

l One of the
CPRI0 to
CPRI5
ports on the
LBBP in the
BBU

RF Cables
Table 3-22 lists the RF cable changes.
Table 3-22 RF cable changes

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

Change
Type

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

RF jumper

To be reused

DIN straight
male
connector

Antenna
feeder

DIN elbow
male
connector

ANT_TX/
RXA and
ANT_RXB
ports on the
RFU

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

430

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Cable

Change
Type

Connector
at One End

Installatio
n Position

Connector
at the Other
End

Installatio
n Position

Inter-RFU
RF signal
cable

To be reused

QMA elbow
male
connector

RX_OUTA
port on the
RFU

QMA elbow
male
connector

RX_INB
port on an
RFU

3.11.2 Installing Power Cables for AC Cabinets


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for various
cabinets when AC power is supplied.

Installing Input Power Cable for the APM30H


The input power cable for the APM30H connects the external power equipment to the input
wiring terminals on the EPU, feeding external power into the cabinets in the BTS3900A.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.


Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
The cabinets used by the BTS3900A in AC scenarios support the power supplies of 220 V AC
three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. Table 3-23 lists the input
power cables that are delivered for the APM30H supplied with different type of power.
Table 3-23 Specifications of input power cables for the APM30H
Cable
Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
220 V AC threephase power
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

L1
wire

Color

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

Brown

OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

l Prepared
onsite

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Black cable
with dual
insulation

431

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Color

One End

The Other
End

L2
wire

Black

OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

L3
wire

Gray

OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

N
wire

Blue

OT terminal (M6,
6 mm2 or 0.009 in.
2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
220 V AC
single-phase
power

L wire

Brown

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

N
wire

Blue

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

Input power
cable for the
APM30H
supplied with
110 V AC duallive-wire power

L1
wire

Black

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

L2
wire

Red

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

N
wire

White

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

Depending
on the
external
equipment

Remarks
layers and
four core
wires

l Prepared
onsite
l Two wires (L
and N), each
with a single
core and two
insulation
layers
l Prepared
onsite
l Three wires
(L1, L2, and
N), each with
a single core
and two
insulation
layers

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the APM30H.
1.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add an OT terminal to each end of the cable according to the instructions in Assembling
the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the APM30H, as shown in Figure 3-123, Figure 3-124, or
Figure 3-125.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

432

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

1.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove an M3 screw from the protective cover for the AC
input terminals, and open the protective cover.

2.

Optional: When 220 V AC three-phase power is supplied, remove the short-circuiting bar
from the L1, L2, and L3 terminals.
NOTE

When 220 V AC single-phase power is supplied, do not remove the short-circuiting bar. When 110 V AC
dual-live-wire power is supplied, the EPU is not configured with any short-circuiting bar.

3.

Route the power cable into the cabinet along the left side, connect each wire to the
corresponding terminal, and use a torque screwdriver to tighten the screws to 4.8 Nm (42.48
lbfin.).

4.

Reinstall the protective cover for AC input terminals, and tighten the screw on the protective
cover to 0.25 Nm (2.21 lbfin.).

Figure 3-123 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC
three-phase)

(1) Short-circuiting bar

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

433

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-124 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (220 V AC
single-phase)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

434

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-125 Installing the input power cable for the APM30H on the EPU side (110 V AC
dual-live-wire)

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H


The power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H include the input power cable for the
TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the TMC11H. The power cables feed power
from the APM30H into the TMC11H and other equipment. You need to reuse the power cables
from the APM30H to the TMC11H with replacing the connectors at both ends.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

435

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Context
l

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

Table 3-24 lists the specifications of the power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H.
Table 3-24 Specifications of power cables from the APM30H to the TMC11H
Cable
Input power
cable for the
TMC11H

Power cable
for the
junction box
in the
TMC11H

Color

One End

The Other End

Remarks

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

EPC4 connector

OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

EPC4 connector

OT terminal
(M6, 4 mm2 or
0.006 in.2)

To be reused, and
the connectors at
both ends need to
be replaced.

L wire

Brow
n

OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)

OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)

N wire

Blue

OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002
in.2)

OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the input power cable for the TMC11H and power cable for the junction box in the
TMC11H.
1.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add a connector to each end of the input power cable for the TMC11H and the power cable
for the junction box in the TMC11H according to the instructions in Table 1. For details,
see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable and Assembling the EPC4 Connector
and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-126.
1.

Remove the protective cover from the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the power cable to the DC output terminal
LOAD7 on the EPU in the APM30H.

3.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H, and tighten the screws on the OT terminals
to 4.8 Nm (42.48 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

436

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4.

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Reinstall the protective cover onto the DC input terminals on the DCDU-12C.

Figure 3-126 Installing the input power cable for the TMC11H

Step 3 Install the power cable for the junction box of the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-127.
1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L3 and N3 terminals in the junction
box of the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the AC input terminals L and N in the junction
box of the TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

437

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-127 Installing power cables for the junction box in the TMC11H

Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing Power Cables from the APM30H to the RFCs


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables from the
APM30H to the RFCs.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

438

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Context
l

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

Table 3-25 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs.
Table 3-25 Power cables from the APM30H to the RFCs
Cable

Color

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)

OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)

Cables are
newly
delivered.

OT terminal (M6, 25
mm2 or 0.039 in.2)

OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)

Cables are
newly
delivered.

Input power
cable for the
RFC
(between the
APM30H
and the RFC
right below
the
APM30H)

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Input power
cable for the
RFC
(between the
APM30H
and the RFC
on the lower
right side)

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Procedure
Step 1 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC right below the
APM30H), as shown in Figure 3-128.
1.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the RFC1 port on the EPU in the
APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12A in the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

439

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-128 Installing the input power cable for the RFC

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC (between the APM30H and the RFC on the lower right
side), as shown in Figure 3-129.
1.

Connect the OT terminal at one end of the power cable to the RFC2 port on the EPU in the
APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals on the DCDU-12A in the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

440

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-129 Installing the input power cable for the RFC

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 4 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 5 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T (One
IBBS200D or IBBS200T Configured)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from the
APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T when one IBBS200D or IBBS200T is configured in
the initial configuration.

Prerequisites
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

441

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

The PGND cable is installed.

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.


Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l

A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Table 3-26 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.
Table 3-26 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200D or IBBS200T
Cable

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

Prepared onsite

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

Prepared onsite

OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)

OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)

Prepared onsite

OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.
2)

OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)

To be reused

Power cables
for the fan in
an
IBBS200D

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Power cable
for a battery
cabinet

RTN
(+)
wire

Red

NEG
(-)
wire

Black

L wire

Brow
n

N
wire

Blue

Power cable
for the
heating film
in the
IBBS200D

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Color

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

442

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the cable.
1.

Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be configured and
determine the cable to be prepared and installed according to Table 1.

2.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

3.

Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable
l Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable

Step 2 Install the power cable for the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 3-130.
1.

Connect the M8 OT terminal at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen
on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box in the
lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Figure 3-130 Installing the power cable for the battery cabinet

Step 3 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 3-131.
NOTE

If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

443

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 on
the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.

Figure 3-131 Installing the power cable for the fan assembly in the IBBS200D

Step 4 Install the power cable for the heating film in the IBBS200D, as shown in Figure 3-132.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.

1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the junction
box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in the
junction box on the inner left wall of the IBBS200D.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

444

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-132 Installing the power cables for the heating films in the IBBS200Ds

NOTICE
When installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do not
connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 3-133.
l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.
l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from the
top, not from the bottom.

Figure 3-133 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of
the IBBS200Ds

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

445

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 5 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown in Figure 3-134.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 on
the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the battery cabinet.

Figure 3-134 Installing the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T

Step 6 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
NOTE

When routing cables along the right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cables
that are routed in front of the power distribution box. For easy maintenance in the future, do not bind the cables
that are routed in front of the power distribution box.

Step 7 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

446

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 8 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing the Power Cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
(Two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts Configured)
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the power cables from the
APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts when two IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts are configured
in the initial configuration.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.


Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l

A site can only be configured with either the IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Table 3-27 lists the power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts.
Table 3-27 Power cables from the APM30H to the IBBS200Ds or IBBS200Ts
Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Color

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

Prepared onsite

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

The power cable


is reused with
connectors at
both end
replaced.

Power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the
IBBS200D

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Cascading
power cable
for the fan
assembly in
the
IBBS200D

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

447

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Cable

Color

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

Prepared onsite

EPC4 connector

EPC4 connector

The power cable


is reused with
connectors at
both end
replaced.

OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)

OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)

Prepared onsite

OT terminal (M8, 35
mm2 or 0.05 in.2)

OT terminal
(M8, 35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2)

Prepared onsite

OT terminal (M4,
1.5 mm2 or 0.002 in.
2)

OT terminal
(M4, 1.5 mm2 or
0.002 in.2)

To be reused

Power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Cascading
power cable
for the TEC
in the
IBBS200T

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

NEG
(-)
wire

Blue

Power cable
for batteries

RTN
(+)
wire

Red

NEG
(-)
wire

Black

Cascading
power cable
for the
batteries

RTN
(+)
wire

Red

NEG
(-)
wire

Black

Power cable
(two wires)
for the
heating film
in the
IBBS200D

L wire

Brow
n

N
wire

Blue

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the cable.
1.

Confirm the type of the battery cabinet (IBBS200D or IBBS200T) to be configured and
determine the cable to be prepared and installed according to Table 1.

2.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

3.

Add a connector at each end of the cable by performing the following operations:
l Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

448

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

l Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable


Step 2 Install power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P1 in Figure 3-135.
1.

Connect the OT terminal (M8) at one end to the DC input terminal near the BAT silkscreen
on the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
terminals near the BAT silkscreen in the lower part of the power distribution box in the
lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Step 3 Install cascading power cables for the storage batteries, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-135.
1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) wiring
terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the upper part of the power distribution box in the
lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-)
wiring terminals near the BAT silkscreen on the lower part of the power distribution box
in the upper IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Figure 3-135 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the storage batteries

Step 4 Install the power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure 3-136.
NOTE

If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

449

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 on
the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen on the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

Step 5 Install the cascading power cable for the fan in the IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure
3-136.
NOTE

If no IBBS200D is configured, skip this step.

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.

Figure 3-136 Installing the power cables and cascading power cables for the fan in the
IBBS200D

Step 6 Install the power cable for the heating film in the upper IBBS200D, as shown by P1 in Figure
3-137.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

450

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L1 and N1 terminals in the junction
box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in the
junction box on the inner left wall of the upper IBBS200D.

Step 7 Install the power cable for the heating film in the lower IBBS200D, as shown by P2 in Figure
3-137.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200D is configured or no heating film is configured in the IBBS200D.

1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the cable to the L2 and N2 terminals in the junction
box on the inner left wall of the APM30H.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the cable to the L and N terminals in the
junction box on the inner left wall of the lower IBBS200D.

Figure 3-137 Installing the power cables for the heating films in the IBBS200Ds

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

451

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

NOTICE
When installing the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of the IBBS200Ds, do not
connect the cables in the manner shown in Figure 3-138.
l Do not expose the wires of the power cable outside the power supply box.
l The power cables for the heating films must be routed into the power supply boxes from the
top, not from the bottom.

Figure 3-138 Incorrect connections of the heating-film power cables in the junction boxes of
the IBBS200Ds

Step 8 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P1 in Figure 5.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the DC output terminal LOAD8 on
the right side of the EPU in the APM30H.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the FAN/TEC port near the
INPUT silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

Step 9 Install the power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T, as shown by P2 in Figure 3-139.
NOTE

Skip this step if no IBBS200T is configured.

1.

Connect the EPC4 connector at one end of the cable to the OUTPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the lower battery cabinet.

2.

Connect the EPC4 connector at the other end of the cable to the INPUT port near the FAN/
TEC silkscreen in the middle of the power distribution box in the upper battery cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

452

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-139 Installing the power cable and cascading power cable for the TEC in the IBBS200T

Step 10 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
NOTE

When routing cables along the right side of the IBBS200D or IBBS200T, reserve sufficient slack in the cables
that are routed in front of the power distribution box. For easy maintenance in the future, do not bind the cables
that are routed in front of the power distribution box.

Step 11 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 12 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

(Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable


When the BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

453

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

The original RRU power cable can be reused only if it meets the power supply and length
requirements of the new RRU.

The colors and structures of the power cables are for reference only, which may differ from
those of the cables onsite.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.


Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
l

The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the
RRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installation
guide.

Table 3-28 lists the specifications of RRU power cables when a DCDU-12B supplies
power.
Table 3-28 Specifications of the RRU power cable
Cable
RRU
power
cable

Color

One End

The Other End

Remarks

RTN
(+)

Black

EPC5 or EPC4
connector

Depending on
the RRU port

NEG
(-)

Blue

l If the
original
RRU power
cable can be
reused, you
need to
replace the
connector on
the
DCDU-12B
side.
l If the
original
RRU power
cable must
be replaced,
you need to
add new
connectors
to both ends
of the new
RRU power
cable onsite.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

454

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Procedure
Step 1 Route the RRU power cable into the cabinet through the cable hole.
Step 2 Remove the ground clip in the cabinet, and put the removed ground clip into the ESD bag or
box.
Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 3-140.
1.

Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC to expose the shield layer.

2.

Strip the shield layer to expose the two core wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC.

3.

Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw on the ground clip to 1.2 Nm
(10.62 lbfin.).
Figure 3-140 Installing the ground clip

4.

Install the PGND cables with the ground clips onto the two self-clinching studs on the right
wall of the RFC. Then tighten the self-clinching studs to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).

Step 4 Add an EPC5 or EPC4 connector to the RRU power cable on the DCDU-12B side. For details
about how to add the connector, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable or
Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Stick a temporary label onto the RRU power cable to be installed.
Step 6 Connect the one end of the cable to the RRU.
Step 7 Connect the EPC5 or EPC4 connector on the RRU power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD8
ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 3-141.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

455

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

CAUTION
When installing the RRU power cable for an RRU that is added to a running base station, connect
the RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequence
may cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.

Figure 3-141 Installing the RRU power cable

Step 8 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailed
operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

3.11.3 Installing Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing power cables for various
cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

456

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Installing Input Power Cables for Cabinets in -48 V DC Scenarios


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing input power cables for the
RFC and TMC11H when -48 V DC power is supplied.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

The colors and structures of the power cables may vary from the following table.

The colors and structures of cables vary according to countries and areas. If cables are
purchased at local markets, the cables must comply with local rules and regulations.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:

Context

The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.


Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.
As listed in Table 3-29, power cables for the RFC have two specifications: 35 mm2 (0.05 in.2)
and 16 mm2 (0.02 in.2).
Table 3-29 Input power cables for the RFC
Cable
Input power
cable for the
RFC

RTN
(+)
wire

(35 mm2 or
0.05 in.2, one
group)

NEG
Blue
(-) wire

Input power
cable for the
RFC

RTN
(+)
wire

(16 mm2 or
0.02 in.2, two
groups)

NEG
Blue
(-) wire

Input power
cable for the
TMC11H
(the
TMC11H is
powered by
the RFC)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Color

RTN
(+)
wire

Black

Black

Black

One End

The Other
End

Remarks

OT terminal (M6,
35 mm2 or 0.05 in.
2)

Depending on
the external
equipment

The power
cable is made
onsite.

OT terminal
(M6, 25 mm2 or
0.039 in.2)

The power
cable is made
onsite.

OT terminal (M6,
16 mm2 or 0.02 in.
2)

OT terminal (M6,
25 mm2 or 0.039
in.2)

NEG
Blue
(-) wire

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

457

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare input power cables for the RFC.
1.

Cut the cable to a length suitable for the actual cable route.

2.

Add connectors to both ends of the input power cable for the RFC according to Table 1.
For details, see Assembling the OT Terminal and the Power Cable.

Step 2 Install the input power cable for the RFC, as shown in Figure 3-142.
1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals
in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end to the external power supply.

Figure 3-142 Installing the input power cable for the RFC

Step 3 Install the input power cable for the TMC11H, as shown in Figure 3-143.
1.

Connect the OT terminals at one end of the power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG(-) terminals
in the junction box on an inner wall of the RFC.

2.

Connect the OT terminals at the other end of the input power cable to the RTN(+) and NEG
(-) terminals on the DCDU-12C in the TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

458

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-143 Installing the input power cable for the TMC11H

Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 5 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

(Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable


When the BTS3900A is configured with RFUs and RRUs, the RRUs are powered by the
DCDU-12B in the RFC.

Prerequisites
l

The following tools are available: a Phillips screwdriver, a torque screwdriver, a cable
cutter, and a multi-purpose crimping tool.

The PGND cable is installed.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

459

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Context
l

The colors and structures of the power cables in this document are for reference only, which
may differ from those of the cables onsite.

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

The type of connector connecting to the power port on the RRU depends on the type of the
RRU. For how to add a connector to an RRU power cable, see the related RRU installation
guide.

Table 3-30 lists the specifications of the RRU power cable when a DCDU-12B supplies
power.
Table 3-30 Specifications of the RRU power cable
Cable
RRU
power
cable

Color

One End

The Other End

Remarks

RTN
(+)

Black

EPC5 or EPC4
connector

Depending on
the RRU port

NEG
(-)

Blue

l If the
original
RRU power
cable can be
reused, you
need to
replace the
connector on
the
DCDU-12B
side.
l If the
original
RRU power
cable must
be replaced,
you need to
add new
connectors
to both ends
of the new
RRU power
cable onsite.

NOTE

If the RRU is to be placed at a longer distance, replace the original RRU power cable with a longer
one.

Procedure
Step 1 Route an RRU power cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

460

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 2 Remove the ground clip in the cabinet, and put the removed ground clip into the ESD bag or
box.
Step 3 Install the ground clip, as shown in Figure 3-145.
1.

Strip a length of jacket off the RRU power cable at the position 300 mm (11.81 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC to expose the shield layer.

2.

Strip the shield layer to expose the two core wires at the position 350 mm (13.78 in.) away
from the cable bag in the RFC.

3.

Route the RRU power cable through the ground clip and ensure that the shield layer securely
contacts with the ground clip. Then tighten the M4 screw to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
NOTE

When installing a ground clip for the RRU power cables, comply with the following rules:
l When one to three RRU power cables are installed, put all the RRU power cables on one side of the
ground screw, as shown by illustration 1 in Figure 3-144.
l When four or six RRU power cables are installed, put two or three RRU power cables on each side of
the ground screw, as shown by illustration 2 in Figure 3-144.
l When five RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread three cables
through one ground clip and two cables through the other group clip, or thread four cables through
one ground clip or one cable through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration 3 in Figure
3-144.
l When seven to ten RRU power cables or twelve RRU power cables are installed, use two ground clips
and comply with the preceding rules.
l When eleven RRU power cables are installed, two ground clips are required. You can thread five
cables through one ground clip and six cables through the other ground clip, as shown by illustration
4 in Figure 3-144.

Figure 3-144 Installing the ground clips (side elevation view)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

461

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-145 Installing the ground clips

Step 4 Add an EPC5 or EPC4 connector to the RRU power cable on the DCDU-12B side. For details
about how to add the connector, see Assembling the EPC5 Connector and the Power Cable or
Assembling the EPC4 Connector and the Power Cable.
Step 5 Stick a temporary label onto the RRU power cable to be installed.
Step 6 Connect the one end of the cable to the RRU.
Step 7 Connect the EPC5 or EPC4 connector on the RRU power cable to one of the LOAD0 to LOAD8
ports on the DCDU-12B, as shown in Figure 3-146.

CAUTION
When installing the RRU power cable for an RRU that is added to a running base station, connect
the RRU power cable first to the RRU and then to the DCDU. Operations in the reverse sequence
may cause damage to the components and injury of human bodies.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

462

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-146 Installing the RRU power cable

Step 8 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 9 Use a PVC corrugated pipe to protect the cable outside the cabinet, and tie the pipe to the cable
outlet on the cabinet.
Step 10 Replace the temporary label on the RRU power cable with an engineering label. For detailed
operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

3.11.4 Installing Transmission Cables


This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing transmission cables between
a cabinet and the external transmission equipment.

Installing the E1/T1 Cable


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the E1/T1 cable.

Context
l

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the
E1/T1 cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in the APM30H
that is shown in Figure 3-147.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

463

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Procedure
Step 1 Connect one end of the E1/T1 cable to the OUTSIDE port on the UELP, as shown in Figure
3-147.
NOTE

For the details about the cable connections,


l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station
Cables.

Figure 3-147 Installing the E1/T1 cable

Step 2 Route the other end of the E1/T1 cable out of the cable outlet on the bottom left side of the
cabinet.
Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 4 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing the FE/GE Ethernet Cable


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable.

Context
l

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

464

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.


l

An FE/GE Ethernet cable is a shielded straight-through cable.

When the TMC11H uses the -48 V DC power supply, the connection and routing of the
FE/GE Ethernet cable in this cabinet are the same as the cable connection and routing in
the APM30H that is shown in Figure 3-149.

Procedure
Step 1 Route the FE/GE Ethernet cable through a cable bag into the cabinet.
Step 2 Install a ground clip for the FE/GE cable in a proper position within 1 m from the cable outlet
of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 3-148.
1.

Determine the position for grounding the FE/GE cable, and strip the sheath off the cable
for about 40 mm to expose the shield layer.

2.

Loosen the screws on the ground clip, and route the FE/GE cable through the clip.

3.

Make the shield layer of the FE/GE cable in full contact with the ground clip, and tighten
the M4 screws on the clip until the tightening torque reaches 1.2 Nm.

Figure 3-148 Installing a grounding clip

Step 3 Connect one end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable to the FE0 (or FE/GE0) or FE1 (or FE/GE1) port
near the OUTSIDE label on the UFLP, as shown in Figure 3-149.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

465

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

NOTE

For the details about the cable connections,


l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station
Cables.

Figure 3-149 Installing the FE/GE Ethernet cable

Step 4 Route the other end of the FE/GE Ethernet cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet on
the bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 5 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 6 Label the installed cable according to the instructions in Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

Installing the FE/GE Fiber Optic Cable


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable.

Context
l

Contact with Huawei engineers to confirm the following issues:


The cables and connectors prepared by the customer are to be used.
Some cables of fixed lengths need to be shortened.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

466

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled
as MM.

The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue. The puller of a multi-mode optical
module is black or gray.

The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.

An FE/GE fiber optic cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC
connector, or LC connector at the other end.

SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not
used simultaneously.

SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they are
not used simultaneously.

The method of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in an APM30H is the same as the method
of installing FE/GE fiber optic cables in a TMC11H. The following describes the procedure
for installing an FE/GE fiber optic cable in an APM30H.

NOTICE
An optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes. Therefore,
you must insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20 minutes.

Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 3-150.
1.

Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding FE/GE optical port on the corresponding
BBU board.

2.

Remove the dustproof cap from the optical module.

3.

Lower the puller on the optical module.

4.

Insert the optical module into the FE/GE optical port.

5.

Raise the puller on the optical module.

Figure 3-150 Installing the optical module

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

467

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 2 Insert the optical module into the corresponding FE/GE optical port, as shown in Figure
3-151.
NOTE

For the details about the cable connections,


l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "Transmission Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station
Cables.

Step 3 Stick a temporary label to the FE/GE fiber optic cable to be installed.
Step 4 Insert one end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable into the optical module, as shown in Figure
3-151.
Figure 3-151 Installing the FE/GE fiber optic cable

Step 5 Route the other end of the FE/GE fiber optic cable out of the cabinet through the cable outlet on
the bottom right side of the cabinet.
Step 6 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
Step 7 Replace the temporary label on the FE/GE fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For
detailed operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

3.11.5 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in AC


Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cables
between cabinets when AC power is supplied.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

468

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing a monitoring signal cable
between two cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 3-31 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable changes.

Table 3-31 Specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets in the scenario
of 1 RFC+1 APM30H
Cable

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

Remarks

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 3-152.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

469

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-152 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 3-32 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cables between two
cabinets after the cable changes.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

470

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-32 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

To be reused

Battery
cabinet
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T
and
APM30H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T

RJ45
connector

COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 3-153.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

471

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-153 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Install a battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T and
APM30H), as shown in Figure 3-154.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

472

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-154 Installing the battery cabinet monitoring signal cable (between the IBBS200D
or IBBS200T and APM30H)

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 3-33 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cables between two
cabinets after the cable changes.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

473

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-33 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 TMC11H
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 3-155.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

474

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-155 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),
as shown in Figure 3-156.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

475

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-156 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the TMC11H and RFC)

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 3-34 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

476

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-34 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+1 IBBS200D/IBBS200T+1 TMC11H
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installation
Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T

RJ45
connector

COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 3-157.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

477

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-157 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the IBBS200D or IBBS200T and
APM30H), as shown in Figure 3-158.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

478

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-158 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),
as shown in Figure 3-159.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

479

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-159 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the TMC11H and RFC)

Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 3-35 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

480

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 3-35 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installation
Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
upper
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
and lower
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the upper
IBBS200D

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
(between the
APM30H
and lower
battery
cabinet)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T

RJ45
connector

COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 3-160.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

481

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-160 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the upper IBBS200D/
IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in Figure 3-161.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the upper
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA on the door of
the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

482

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-161 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the
upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery cabinet and the
APM30H), as shown in Figure 3-162.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the lower
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

483

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-162 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery
cabinet and the APM30H)

Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 3-36 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

484

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 3-36 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+1 APM30H+2 IBBS200Ds/IBBS200Ts+1 TMC11H
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
APM30H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
APM30H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
for a battery
cabinet
(between the
APM30H
and lower
battery
cabinet)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T

RJ45
connector

COM_485
port on the
PMU in the
APM30H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
TMC11H
and RFC)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the TMC11H

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
upper
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T
and lower
IBBS200D/
IBBS200T)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the upper
IBBS200D

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the lower
IBBS200D

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and APM30H), as shown in
Figure 3-163.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

485

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
APM30H.
Figure 3-163 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
APM30H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the upper IBBS200D/
IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T), as shown in Figure 3-164.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the upper
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA on the door of
the lower IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

486

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-164 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the upper IBBS200D/IBBS200T and lower IBBS200D/IBBS200T)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower battery cabinet and the
APM30H), as shown in Figure 3-165.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA on the door of the lower
IBBS200D or IBBS200T.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_485 port on the PMU in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

487

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-165 Installing a monitoring signal cable for a battery cabinet (between the lower
battery cabinet and the APM30H)

Step 4 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the TMC11H and RFC),
as shown in Figure 3-166.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the TMC11H.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan
assembly of the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

488

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-166 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the TMC11H and RFC)

Step 5 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

3.11.6 Installing Monitoring Signal Cables Between Cabinets in -48


V DC Scenarios
This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the monitoring signal cables
between cabinets when -48 V DC power is supplied.

Scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 3-37 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

489

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-37 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario
of 1 RFC+1 TMC11H
Cable

One End

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC11H)

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan
assembly in
the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU of the
TMC11H

Remarks

To be
reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown in
Figure 3-167.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

490

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-167 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
TMC11H)

Step 2 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs.

Context
Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of the
cabinet. Table 3-38 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two cabinets
after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

491

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-38 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario of
1 RFC+2 TMC11Hs
Cable

One End

The Other End

Remarks

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between the
RFC and
TMC11H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan assembly
in the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the UPEU
in the BBU
of the
TMC11H

To be reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between the
extension
TMC11H
and RFC)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
RJ45
port on the
connector
CMUEA in
the extension
TMC11H

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC

To be reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown in
Figure 3-168.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

492

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-168 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
TMC11H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the extension TMC11H
and RFC), as shown in Figure 3-169.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the extension TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

493

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-169 Installing the monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the extension TMC11H and RFC)

Step 3 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

Scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing signal cables between two
cabinets in the scenario of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs.

Context
l

When a dual-mode base station is converted to a triple-mode base station, a BBU is added
into the APM30H or TMC11H. The added BBU does not perform the monitoring function.
For the monitoring principles in this scenario, see Monitoring Principles.

Monitoring signal cables inside a cabinet have been installed during the restructuring of
the cabinet. Table 3-39 lists the specifications of the monitoring signal cable between two
cabinets after the cable change.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

494

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-39 Specifications of monitoring signal cables between two cabinets in the scenario
of 2 RFCs+2 TMC11Hs
Cable

One End

The Other End

Change
Type

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

CMUEABBU
monitoring
signal cable
(between
the RFC and
TMC11H)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
fan
assembly in
the RFC

RJ45
connector

MON0 port
on the
UPEU in the
BBU of the
TMC11H

To be
reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
the
extension
TMC11H
and RFC)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the
extension
TMC11H

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the RFC

To be
reused

Monitoring
signal cable
between
cascaded
CMUEAs
(between
two RFCs)

RJ45
connector

COM_IN
port on the
CMUEA in
the right
RFC

RJ45
connector

COM_OUT
port on the
CMUEA in
the left RFC

To be
reused

Procedure
Step 1 Install a CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and TMC11H), as shown in
Figure 3-170.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly of
the RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the MON0 port on the UPEU in the BBU of the
TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

495

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-170 Installing the CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable (between the RFC and
TMC11H)

Step 2 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between the extension TMC11H
and RFC), as shown in Figure 3-171.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the right RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the extension TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

496

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-171 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
the extension TMC11H and RFC)

Step 3 Install a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between two RFCs), as shown
in Figure 3-172.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the COM_OUT port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the left RFC.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the COM_IN port on the CMUEA in the fan assembly
of the right RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

497

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-172 Installing a monitoring signal cable between cascaded CMUEAs (between
two RFCs)

Step 4 Lay out the cable according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to
bind the cable.
----End

3.11.7 (Optional) Installing Inter-BBU Signal Cables


This section describes the procedure for installing inter-BBU signal cables for a triple- or singlemode base station.

Prerequisites
l

The optical modules and fiber optic cables are of the multimode type.

The rate of optical modules installed in the UMPT and UCIU is 5 Gbit/s or 2.5 Gbit/s.

The inter-WBBPf signal cable is a QSFP electrical cable.

Optical modules can be divided into single- and multimode optical modules, which can be
distinguished as follows:
l

The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multimode optical
module is black or gray.

The transmission mode is displayed as "SM" on the label of a single-mode optical module
and "MM" on the label of a multimode optical module.

There is a label on each optical module, which provides information such as the rate, wavelength,
and transmission mode, as shown in the following figure.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

498

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-173 Label on an optical module

(1) Rate

(2) Wavelength

(3) Transmission mode

Context
The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBU
signal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU Signal
Cable Connections.
Table 3-40 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected
Interconnection
Mode

Installation Position
BBU 0

BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU

CI port on the UMPT_U

M1 port on the UCIU

CI port on the UMPT_L

HEI port on the WBBPf

HEI port on the WBBPf

NOTE

BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.

NOTICE
The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than
20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20
minutes.
The following table lists BBU interconnection modes and the positions to which inter-BBU
signal cables are connected. For details about BBU interconnection modes, see Inter-BBU Signal
Cable Connections.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

499

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-41 Positions to which inter-BBU signal cables are connected


Interconnection
Mode

Installation Position
BBU 0

BBU 1

UCIU+UMPT

M0 port on the UCIU

CI port on the UMPT_U

M1 port on the UCIU

CI port on the UMPT_L

HEI port on the WBBPf

HEI port on the WBBPf

CI port on the UMPT

CI port on the UMPT

UMPT+UMPT

NOTICE
A color-coding tape marked Master is attached to one end of an inter-BBU cable that connects
two UMPTs in different BBUs. When installing the cable, connect the end marked Master to
the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 0 and the other end to the CI port on the UMPT in BBU 1.
NOTE

BBU 0 is the root BBU, and BBU 1 is the leaf BBU.

NOTICE
The performance of an optical module may deteriorate if it is exposed to the air for more than
20 minutes. Therefore, insert a fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module within 20
minutes.

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the dustproof cap from the corresponding port on the BBU and install the optical
modules in BBU 0 and BBU 1, as shown in the following figure.
1.

Lower the puller of the optical module.

2.

Insert the optical module into the port.

3.

Raise the puller of the optical module.

Figure 3-174 Installing the optical module

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

500

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 2 Remove dustproof caps from both ends of the fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 3-175.
Figure 3-175 Removing the dustproof caps from the fiber optic cable

Step 3 Install one or two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT. The following
figure shows the installation of two inter-BBU signal cables.
NOTE

l You need to install two inter-BBU signal cables connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+UL mode.
l You need to install only one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the UCIU to the UMPT in GU+L or GL+U
mode.

1.

Connect one end of the cables to the M0 and M1 ports on the UCIU in BBU 0.

2.

Connect the other end of the cables to the CI ports on the UMPT_U and UMPT_L in BBU
1.

Step 4 Install one inter-BBU signal cable connecting the WBBPf to the WBBPf, as shown in the
following figure. The inter-BBU signal cable is installed only to interconnect the WBBPf in a
BBU to the WBBPf in another BBU.
1.

Connect one end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 0.

2.

Connect the other end of the cable to the HEI port on the WBBPf in BBU 1.
NOTE

l When two BBUs are installed in the APM30H, connect the signal cables, as shown in Figure 3-176. When
BBU 0 is installed in the APM30H and BBU 1 is installed in the TMC11H, connect the signal cables, as
shown in Figure 3-177.
l Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type. On BBU 1, install optical modules of the same
type as those on BBU 0.
l You need to connect the end labeled 2A and 2B on the fiber optic cable to BBU 0, and the end labeled 1A
and 1B on the fiber optical cable to BBU 1.
l The TX and RX ports on BBU 0 must be connected to the TX and RX ports on BBU 1, respectively.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

501

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-176 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (1)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

502

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-177 Installing BBU interconnection signal cables (2)

Step 5 Lay out the cables according to the instructions in Cabling Requirements. If a fiber optic patch
cord is used as a BBU interconnection signal cable, use binding straps to bind the BBU
interconnection signal cable before using cable ties to secure it. If another type of cable is used
as a BBU interconnection signal cable, directly use cable ties to secure it.
Step 6 Label the installed cables according to the instructions in Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End

3.11.8 Installing the RF Jumper


The RF jumper transmits signals between the RFU and antenna system.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: a cable cutter, PVC insulation tape, and an openend wrench or torque wrench.

Procedure
Step 1 Route the RF jumper into the cabinet through the cable outlet in the cabinet according to one of
the manners shown in Figure 3-178. Lay out the installed RF jumper according to the instructions
in Cabling Requirements.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

503

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-178 Routing of the RF jumper

Step 2 Install the RF jumper, as shown in Figure 3-180 and Figure 3-179.

NOTICE
Connect each RF jumper securely to prevent RF signal leakage.

Figure 3-179 Installing RF jumpers for interconnected RFUs

NOTE

Inter-RFU RF signal cables have been installed in the cabinet before delivery. You only need to check whether
the cables are securely connected.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

504

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-180 Installing RF jumpers for independent RFUs

1.

Connect the DIN connector on the RF jumper to the ANT port on the RFU panel.

2.

Use a 32 mm (1.26 in.) open-end wrench or torque wrench to tighten the two DIN
connectors from bottom to top. Ensure that the tightening torque reaches 25 Nm to 35 Nm
(221.27 lbfin. to 309.78 lbfin.).
Figure 3-181 Tightening the DIN connectors

Step 3 Attach color codings to the RF jumper according to the instructions in Attaching the Color Ring.
Step 4 Connect the DIN straight male connector at the other end of the jumper to the connector on the
feeder.
----End

3.11.9 Installing the CPRI Electrical Cable


The CPRI electrical cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RFU.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

505

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Procedure
Step 1 Insert the SFP connectors at one end of the CPRI electrical cables into the CPRI ports on the
corresponding board in the BBU.
NOTE

For the details about the cable connections,


l SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware
Description.
l SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base Station Cables.
l Details about how to insert or remove CPRI electrical cables, see Inserting and Removing CPRI Cables.

Step 2 Route the other end of the CPRI electrical cable through the cable hole on the inner left side of
the power cabinet and the original RFC, into the extension RFC, and finally to the corresponding
RFU, as shown in Figure 3-182.
Figure 3-182 Installing the CPRI electrical cable

Step 3 Connect the SFP connector on the CPRI electrical cable to the CPRI0 port on the panel of the
RFU, as shown in Figure 3-182.
Step 4 Route the cables by referring to Cabling Requirements and use cable ties to bind the cables.
NOTE

l Wind and bind the redundant part of CPRI electrical cable at the top of the DCDU-12A in the RFC or in the
base of the RFC.
l Lay out the cable according to the manners in Figure 3-182. Ensure that the cable is routed to the RFU
through the cable bridge above the RFUs.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

506

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 5 Attach labels to the installed cables. For details, see Attaching an L-Shaped Label.
----End

3.11.10 (Optional) Installing the CPRI Fiber Optic Cable


The CPRI fiber optic cable transmits CPRI signals between the BBU and RRU.

Context
l

Single-mode optical modules are labeled as SM and multi-mode optical modules are labeled
as MM.

The puller of a single-mode optical module is blue and the puller of a multi-mode optical
module is black or gray.

The optical modules to be installed must match the rates of their corresponding ports.

For details about the connections of CPRI fiber optic cables, see "CPRI Cable Connections"
in the BTS900A Hardware Description.

NOTICE
The performance of an optical module that is exposed to the air for more than 20 minutes may
be abnormal. Therefore, you must insert an fiber optic cable into an unpacked optical module
within 20 minutes.
For the details about the cable connections,
l

SingleRAN7.0 and before, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the BTS3900A (Ver.D)
Hardware Description.

SingleRAN8.0 and later, see section "CPRI Cable Connections" in the 3900 Series Base
Station Cables.

Procedure
Step 1 Install an optical module, as shown in Figure 3-183.
1.

Lower the puller on the optical module.

2.

Insert the optical module into the CPRI port on the GTMU/WBBP/LBBP. Then insert an
optical module of the same type into the CPRI_W, CPRI0, or CPRI0/IR0 port on the RRU.
NOTE

Optical modules with the same labels are of the same type.

3.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Raise the puller on the optical module.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

507

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-183 Installing the optical module

Step 2 Install a CPRI fiber optic cable, as shown in Figure 3-184.


1.

Stick a temporary label to the CPRI fiber optic cable to be installed.

2.

Remove the dustproof cap from the connector on the fiber optic cable.

3.

Insert the DLC connectors labeled 2A and 2B at one end of the CPRI fiber optic cable into
the optical modules in the WBBPLBBPGTMU, WBBP, or LBBPGTMU or WBBP, and
then insert the DLC connectors labeled 1A and 1B at the other end into the optical module
in the RF module.

NOTICE
l When a CPRI fiber optic cable connects a BBU and an RRU, the break-out fiber optic
cables on the BBU side and on the RRU side are 0.34 m (13.39 in.) and 0.03 m (1.18
in.), respectively.
l If an LC-LC fiber optic cable is used, the TX port on the BBU must be connected to the
TX port on the RF module, and the RX port on the BBU must be connected to the RX
port on the RF module.

Figure 3-184 Installing the CPRI fiber optic cable

Step 3 Route the CPRI fiber optic cable along the left of the cabinet, and then lead it out of the cabinet
from the cable hole on the left of the bottom. For details, see Cabling Requirements.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

508

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 4 Replace the temporary label on the CPRI fiber optic cable with an engineering label. For detailed
operations, see Attaching a Sign Plate Label.
----End

3.12 Installation Checklist


After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cable-related items.

Cabinet Installation Checklist


Table 3-42 describes the cabinet installation checklist.
Table 3-42 Cabinet installation checklist
No.

Item

The installation position of the cabinet strictly complies with the engineering
design.

The base is securely installed.

All the bolts, including those for electrical connections, are tightened. The spring
washers and the flat washers are installed in a correct sequence.

The cabinet is neat and clean.

The paint on the surface is satisfactory. The damaged paint is repaired. For details,
see 3.14.3 Repainting.

Labels, tags, and nameplates are correct, legible, and complete.

Installation Environment Checklist


Table 3-43 describes the installation environment checklist.
Table 3-43 Installation environment checklist
No.

Item

No excessive straps or adhesive tapes are left on the cables.

No tapes, tails of cable ties, paper, or packing bags are left around the cabinet.

Antirust powder on the door of the cabinet is cleared.

Electrical Connection Checklist


Table 3-44 describes the electrical connection checklist.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

509

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-44 Electrical connection checklist


No.

Item

All self-made PGND cables are copper-based with proper core diameters. There
should not be any switch or fuse in the grounding system. No short circuit is allowed.

The PGND cable is securely connected and the AC input power cable and cables
in the cabinet are correctly connected according to the electrical design of the power
system. The screws are tightened. In addition, the inputs or outputs are not shortcircuited.

The redundant part of the power cable or PGND cable is cut off rather than coiled.

The terminals at both ends of the power cable or PGND cable are securely soldered
or crimped.

The bare wires and the terminal handles at the wiring terminals are coated with heat
shrink tubing.

The flat washer and the spring washer are well mounted on all OT terminals.

The exterior of the battery is intact without any scratch, dent, or crack.

The shell of the battery is clean without any leakage trace.

The wiring post on the battery stands properly without any damage, and the post is
not covered with any acid substances.

10

The pressure relief valve of the battery is not deformed, and no liquid leaks.

11

The power cables for the storage batteries are correctly connected to the positive
and negative poles.

12

The voltage of the battery is normal.


l The voltage of a 2 V battery cell ranges from 1.8 V to 2.35 V.
l The voltage of a 12 V battery cell ranges from 10.8 V to 14.1 V.
l The total voltage of the batteries ranges from 43.2 V to 56.4 V.

13

The circuit breakers for the batteries are set to OFF.

Cable Installation Checklist


Table 3-45 describes the cable installation checklist.
Table 3-45 Cable installation checklist

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No.

Item

All cables, especially the Ethernet cables for communication, are securely
connected. All cable connectors at the bottom of the cabinet are securely installed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

510

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

No.

Item

The cables are neatly and tightly bound. The cable ties are evenly spaced and face
the same direction.

Different types of power cables are bound separately when being routed, for
example, the power cables, PGND cables, feeders, fiber optic cables, and E1/T1/
FE cables.

The layout of all cables facilitates the maintenance and capacity expansion. For
example, the maintenance transfer cable is bound to the outside of the BBU cable
claw, as shown in Figure 3-185.

Legible labels are attached to both ends of all cables.

The extra length of the indoor cable ties is cut off, and the cut surfaces are smooth
without sharp edges. The extra length of 3 mm to 5 mm (0.12 in. to 0.2 in.) of the
outdoor cable ties is reserved when the cable ties are cut.

The port that no cable is connected to is properly protected.

The connectors of the RF cables are secured to avoid false connection that will cause
an abnormal voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR).

Figure 3-185 Checking the maintenance transfer cable

Checklist for the Hardware Upgrade


Table 3-46 describes the checklist for the hardware upgrade.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

511

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-46 Checklist for the hardware upgrade

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No
.

Cabinet Type

Item

APM30H/
TMC11H

The ground cable for the EPU subrack has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 3.6.5 Replacing the Power System.

APM30H/
TMC11H

The vacant customer space in the cabinet has been configured with
the filler module.

APM30H/
TMC11H

The ELU has been replaced, For detailed operations, see 3.7.4
Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are
correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

APM30H

The input power cable for the APM30H has been replaced. For
detailed operations, see Installing Input Power Cable for the
APM30H.

APM30H

The input power cable for the junction box has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

APM30H

The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

APM30H

The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has been
installed. For detailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in
the Cabinet.

APM30H

The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,
see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 3.10.1 Installing
the BBU Case.

APM30H

The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,
see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

10

APM30H

The monitoring signal transfer cable and CMUEA-BBU


monitoring signal cable have been installed. For detailed
operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

11

APM30H

The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has been
installed. For detailed operations, see 3.6.7 Installing Cables in
the Cabinet.

12

TMC11H

The power cable for the fan assembly has been installed. For
detailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

13

TMC11H

The monitoring signal cable for the fan in the front door has been
installed. For detailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in
the Cabinet.

14

TMC11H

The BBU power cable has been installed. For detailed operations,
see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet or 3.10.1 Installing
the BBU Case.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

512

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

No
.

Cabinet Type

Item

15

TMC11H

The ELU signal cable has been installed. For detailed operations,
see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

16

TMC11H

The CMUEA-BBU monitoring signal cable has been installed.


For detailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in the
Cabinet.

17

TMC11H

The monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor has been
installed. For detailed operations, see 3.7.6 Installing Cables in
the Cabinet.

18

RFC

The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 3.8.3
Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are
correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

19

RFC

The monitoring signal cable for the temperature sensor,


monitoring signal cable for the door status sensor, and ELU signal
cable have been installed. For detailed operations, see 3.8.7
Installing Cables in the Cabinet.

20

RFC

In DC scenarios, the junction box has been installed. For detailed


operations, see 3.8.6 (Optional) Installing the DC Junction
Box.

21

RFC

In AC scenarios, the input power cable for the RFC has been
replaced. For detailed operations, see Installing Power Cables
from the APM30H to the RFCs.

22

RFC

The shield layer of the RRU power cable has been grounded. For
detailed operations, see (Optional) Installing the RRU Power
Cable or (Optional) Installing the RRU Power Cable.

23

IBBS200D/
IBBS200T

The ELU has been replaced. For detailed operations, see 3.9.3
Replacing the ELU. Ensure that all newly installed ELUs are
correct and functional. An incorrect or faulty ELU may cause
problems in heat dissipation or monitoring.

3.13 Powering On a Base Station


This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply
to the components in a cabinet.

Prerequisites
l

Input power cables for the BTS3900A are correctly connected.

The power supply to the BTS3900A meets the requirements of the power system.

The external power supply to the BTS3900A has been shut off.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

513

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

All circuit breakers in the APM30H have been set to OFF.

All circuit breakers (if any) on the DCDUs in the RFC and TMC11H have been set to OFF.

All circuit breakers on the power distribution box in the IBBS200D or IBBS200T have
been set to OFF.

Switch on the power distribution box in the IBBS700D or IBBS700T has been set to OFF.

Circuit breakers on the boards in the BBU have been set to OFF.

Boards, modules, and cables have been installed in the cabinet.

Context

DANGER
Exercise caution when performing a power-on check, which involves some high voltage
operations. Direct contact with the input voltage or indirect contact with the input voltage using
a damp object may be fatal.

NOTICE
l Power on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it. If you power off a cabinet or
BBU for maintenance, restore power to the cabinet or BBU within 48 hours.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it. If you power off an RRU for
maintenance, restore power to the RRU within 24 hours.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

514

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-47 Circuit breakers in BTS3900A base stations


Base
Station

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

BTS3900A
(Ver.B)

EPS 01A or EPS 01C,


DCDU-01, DCDU-03B,
DCDU-03C, or power
distribution box

l Circuit breakers on the EPS 01A or EPS 01C


l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2
circuit breakers on the power distribution box
in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SPARE2, SPARE1, BBU, FAN, and RFU0 to
RFU5 circuit breakers on the DCDU-01 (The
circuit breakers control the power input to the
BBU, fan assembly, and RFUs.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-03B (The circuit breakers control the
power input to the RRU 0 to RRU 5, BBU, fan
assembly, and customer transmission
equipment.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-03C (The circuit breakers control the
power input to the BBU, fan assembly, and
customer transmission equipment.)

BTS3900A
(Ver.C)

EPU03A-02 or
EPU03A-04,
DCDU-11A,
DCDU-11B,
DCDU-11C, and power
distribution box

l Circuit breakers on the EPU03A-02 or


EPU03A-04
l BAT_SW0, BAT_SW1, and FAN/TEC_SW2
circuit breakers on the power distribution box
in an IBBS200D or IBBS200T
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11A (SW0 to SW8 circuit breakers
control the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,
FAN 01B, and BBU 0 and BBU 1. The SW9
circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11B (SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers
control the power input to the RFU 0 to RFU 5,
BBU 0 and BBU 1, EMUA, and FAN 02B. The
SW9 circuit breaker is reserved.)
l SW0 to SW9 circuit breakers on the
DCDU-11C (SW0 to SW5 circuit breakers
control the power input to the transmission
equipment. SW6 to SW9 circuit breakers
control the power input to BBU 0 and BBU 1,
EMUA, and FAN 02B.)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

515

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Base
Station

Power Device(1)

Circuit Breaker

BTS3900A
(Ver.D)

EPU05A-02 or
EPU05A-04,
DCDU-12A,
DCDU-12B,
DCDU-12C, and power
distribution box

l Circuit breakers on the EPU05A-02 or


EPU05A-04
l BAT_SW0 and BAT_SW1 circuit breakers on
the power distribution box in an IBBS200D or
IBBS200T
l Switch on the power distribution box in an
IBBS700D or IBBS700T

NOTE

(1) In this section, EPU05A-02 or EPU05A-04 and EPU03A-02 or EPU03A-04 are shortened to EPU, EPS 01A
or EPS 01C is shortened to EPS, and a DCDU of any model is shortened to DCDU.

Process
The following figure shows the power-on check process.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

516

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-186 Power-on check process

Procedure
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Power on an AC base station.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

517

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

1.

Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and
the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.

2.

Optional: If the base station is configured with a battery cabinet, set the BAT circuit
breaker on the EPU or EPS to ON and set the circuit breaker on the power distribution
box in the battery cabinet to ON. Otherwise, skip this substep.

3.

Turn on the external power circuit breaker to power on the APM30H and battery
cabinet.

4.

Set the circuit breakers on the EPU or EPS for the corresponding components to ON,
and check the power supply status of each component.
Table 3-48 Normal status of the components powered by the EPU or EPS
Cabinet

Compone
nt

Normal Power Supply Status

APM30H

PMU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.

PSU

l The power indicator is steady green.


l The fault indicator is steady off.

Fan
assembly

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).
l The ALM indicator is steady off.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Fan in the
front door

The fan is working properly.

IBBS200D
or
IBBS200T

Fan or TEC
in the front
door

The fan or the TEC is working properly, and the RUN


indicator on the CMUA, CMUE, or CMUEA is
blinking (on for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s
and off for 1s).

IBBS700D

Fan in the
front door
and
CMUEA

The fan is working properly, and the RUN indicator


on the CMUEA is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

IBBS700T

TEC and
CMUF

The TEC is working properly, and the RUN indicator


on the CMUF is blinking (on for 0.125s and off for
0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

5.

Optional: Set the circuit breakers for the corresponding components on each DCDU
in the RFC and TMC11H to ON. Skip this substep if there is no circuit breaker on the
DCDU, such as the DCDU-12A, DCDU-12B, and DCDU-12C.

6.

Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.

7.

Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

518

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-49 Normal status of components in the cabinet


Cabinet

Compone
nt

Normal Power Supply Status

APM30H

BBU

l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.


l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).
l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off
for 1s). The indicators indicating the status of the
CPRI ports are in status other than steady reda.

TMC11H

RFC

FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

Fan in the
front door

The fan is working properly.

RFU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

RRU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 1s and off


for 1s).

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

l The ALM indicator is steady off.


a: If the indicators indicating the status of the CPRI ports are steady red, check
whether the optical module is faulty or the fiber optic cable is broken.

NOTE

The indicators in the preceding table are only examples. For the status of other indicators, see
BBU Hardware Description.

8.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,
handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

519

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Table 3-50 Troubleshooting


Failure Type

Handling Measure

Failure in the power


supply to all
components in the
cabinet

Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.

Failure in the power


supply to a board in
the BBU

Check as follows:

l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit


breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.
l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.

1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the


slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.
Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the status
of indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove the
board, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards of
the same type, and check the status of the indicators.
l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.
l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

520

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Failure Type

Handling Measure

Failure in the power


supply to other
components in the
cabinet

Check as follows:
1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skip
this step and go to step 2 if this component does not use
any fuse terminal block.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse according
to the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, go
to step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to the
component.
l If the input power is normal, replace the component.
l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connected
securely. If the power cable is not securely
connected, turn off the circuit breaker for the
component (if there is no circuit breaker for the
component, remove the connector from the power
unit) and reconnect the power cable. If the power
cable is securely connected, the protector (such as
circuit breaker or fuse) on the component may be
damaged. In this case, replace the damaged
protector. If the protector cannot be replaced,
replace the upper-level power distribution
component.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Power on a DC base station.


1.

Use a multimeter to measure the resistance between the external power supply and
the ground to ensure that there is no short circuit.

2.

Turn on the external power switch to power on the RFC cabinet. Power on the
TMC11H if it is configured as a transmission cabinet.

3.

Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the RFC to ON.
Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as DCDU-12A
and DCDU-12B.

4.

Optional: Set the circuit breakers connected to loads on the DCDU in the TMC11H
to ON. Skip this step if there is no power circuit breaker on the DCDU, such as
DCDU-12C.

5.

Set the circuit breaker on the UPEU in the BBU to ON.

6.

Check the power supply to each component according to the following table.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

521

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Table 3-51 Normal status of components in the cabinet


Cabinet

Compone
nt

Normal Power Supply Status

TMC11H

BBU

l UPEU: The RUN indicator is steady on.


l FAN: The STATE indicator is blinking (on for 1s
and off for 1s).
l Other boards: The RUN indicator is blinking (on
for 0.125s and off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off
for 1s).

RFC

FAN 02A/
FAN 02B/
FAN 02D

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

Fan in the
front door

The fan is working properly.

RFU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

FAN 01A/
FAN 01B/
FAN 01C

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

RRU

l The RUN indicator is blinking (on for 0.125s and


off for 0.125s or on for 1s and off for 1s).

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

l The ALM indicator is steady off.

7.

Optional: If the power supply to a component fails after the cabinet is powered on,
handle the fault according to the instructions in the following table.
Table 3-52 Troubleshooting

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Failure Type

Handling Measure

Failure in the power


supply to all
components in the
cabinet

Check whether the power cables are reversely connected.


l If the cables are incorrectly connected, set all the circuit
breakers to OFF, and then reconnect the power cables.
l If the cables are correctly connected, replace the power
units.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

522

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Failure Type

Handling Measure

Failure in the power


supply to a board in
the BBU

Check as follows:
1. Remove the board, and check whether any pin of the
slot on the backplane is bent, broken, or missing.
Replace the subrack if necessary.
2. Insert the board into the subrack, and check the status
of indicators on the board.
3. If the indicators indicate an exception, remove the
board, insert it into a vacant slot holding the boards of
the same type, and check the status of the indicators.
l If the board works properly, the original slot is
faulty. In this case, replace the subrack.
l If the fault persists, the board is faulty. In this case,
replace the board.

Failure in the power


supply to other
components in the
cabinet

Check as follows:
1. Check whether the indicator on the fuse terminal block
that connects power supply to the component is on. Skip
this step and go to step 2 if this component does not use
any fuse terminal block.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is on, the
fuse is faulty. In this case, replace the fuse according
to the instructions in Replacing a Fuse.
l If the indicator on the fuse terminal block is off, go
to step 2.
2. Use a multimeter to measure the input power to the
component.
l If the input power is normal, replace the component.
l If the input power is abnormal, check whether the
power cable for the component is connected
securely. If the power cable is not securely
connected, turn off the circuit breaker for the
component (if there is no circuit breaker for the
component, remove the connector from the power
unit) and reconnect the power cable. If the power
cable is securely connected, the protector (such as
circuit breaker or fuse) on the component may be
damaged. In this case, replace the damaged
protector. If the protector cannot be replaced,
replace the upper-level power distribution
component.

----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

523

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

3.14 Subsequent Operations


This section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgraded
and checked.

3.14.1 Replacing Labels on the Cabinet Door


The barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label on the cabinet
door need to be replaced after the upgrade.

Context
The front door of the cabinet has been replaced during restructuring of the APM30H and
TMC11H cabinets. You only need to replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card,
and power distribution label.

Procedure
Step 1 Stick the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to the
APM30H and TMC11H cabinets. Their positions are shown in Figure 3-187.
Figure 3-187 Positions of labels for the cabinet

(1) Barcode label

(2) Qualification card

(3) Power distribution label

(4) Nameplate

Step 2 Replace the barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label in the RFC
and IBBS200D or IBBS200T cabinets.
1.

Take out the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label
for the cabinet.

2.

Stick the new barcode label, nameplate, qualification card, and power distribution label to
the same positions as the original labels in the cabinet.

----End

3.14.2 Sealing the Cable Outlets


After all cables are installed, you need to seal all cable outlets on the cabinet and base.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

524

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Procedure
Step 1 Apply fireproof mud to the cable holes on both sides of the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC,
IBBS200T, or IBBS200D cabinet, as shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-188 Sealing the cable holes in the APM30H, TMC11H, RFC, IBBS200T, or
IBBS200D cabinet

(1) Fireproof mud

Step 2 Seal the RF cable holes in the RFC, as shown in the following figure.
1.

Route the cables through the corresponding cable holes, and install the cable outlet module
on the bottom of the cabinet.

2.

Use rubber caps to seal the unused cable holes in the cable outlet module.

3.

Tighten the screw on the cable outlet module.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

525

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-189 Sealing the cable holes in the RFC

(1) Cable holes for the


power cables

(2) Cable holes for CPRI (3) Cable hole for the
electrical cables
monitoring signal cable

(4) Cable hole for the


equipotential cable

(5) Cable hole for the


monitoring signal cable

(6) Screw

Step 3 Use baffle plates to block redundant space in the cable outlets and tighten the two screws on
each baffle plate, as shown in Figure 3-190.
Figure 3-190 Sealing the cable outlets on the base

(1) Baffle plate on the right

(2) Baffle plate at the rear

(3) Baffle plate on the left

Step 4 Use fireproof mud to seal the cable outlets on the base, as shown in Figure 3-191.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

526

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Figure 3-191 Sealing cable outlets on the base using fireproof mud

(1) Fireproof mud

(2) PVC corrugated pipe

Step 5 Tighten the three screws on the front baffle plate of the base and close the baffle plate.
----End

3.14.3 Repainting
The paint on the surface of the cabinet should be kept satisfactory. Therefore, any damaged paint
must be repaired.

Prerequisites
Before repainting the cabinet, select the paint of the same color according to Table 3-53.
Table 3-53 Color codes
Applied to

Color

Huawei Code

International Code

Cabinet

RAL7035

YB026

RAL7035

Base

3010 light gray

YB030

Pantone 422U

Procedure
Step 1 If the area where the paint is damaged is dirty or the material is rusted, rub the area with sandpaper
slightly to remove the dirt or rust, as shown in Figure 3-192.
Figure 3-192 Rubbing the damaged area with sandpaper

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

527

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 2 Use anhydrous alcohol to dampen a cloth and use the wet cloth to remove dirt or dust from the
rubbed area or the area to be repaired. Then dry the area with another clean cloth, as shown in
Figure 3-193.
Figure 3-193 Cleaning the damaged area with anhydrous alcohol

Step 3 Paint the surface of the cabinet with paint of the same color.
Step 4 Shake the bottle of the paint, open the bottle, and saturate the brush with the paint. Then apply
the paint evenly to the damaged area until no scar can be observed, as shown in Figure 3-194.

NOTICE
The paint coating should be as thin as possible. No drops are allowed on the paint coating, and
the surface should be smooth.

Figure 3-194 Repaint the damaged paint coating of the cabinet

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

528

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

3 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.B) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_B)

Step 5 Perform subsequent operations after the repaired paint coating is exposed in the air for 30
minutes.
NOTE

The color of the repaired paint coating area should be consistent with that of the surrounding areas, without
obvious edges and bulges, and the original damage should no longer be distinguishable. In addition, there
should be no paint peeled off.

----End

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

529

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to


BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2)

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to restructure the cabinets during the upgrade from BTS3900A
(Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).
4.1 Introduction to Upgrade
This section describes configuration of enhanced cabinets after being upgraded and reuse
procedures.
4.2 Installation Preparations
This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also
specifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.
4.3 Unpacking Check
Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.
4.4 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30H
cabinet to be restructured.
4.5 Restructuring the TMC11H Cabinet
This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the TMC11H
cabinet to be restructured.
4.6 Restructuring the RFC Cabinet
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the RFC
cabinet to be restructured.
4.7 Restructuring the IBBS200T
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the IBBS200T
to be restructured.
4.8 Installing the PGND Cable and Equipotential Cable

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

530

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

A PGND cable connects a ground screw in a cabinet and the PGND bar to ensure proper
grounding of the cabinet. An equipotential cable connects PGND screws on different cabinets
to ensure the equipotential bonding between the cabinets.
4.9 Installing the Optional Modules and Their Cables
This chapter describes the procedures for installing optional modules and connecting the
modules to external devices.
4.10 Installing Cables Between Two Cabinets
This chapter describes the procedure and precautions for installing cables between two cabinets
during the upgrade.
4.11 Installation Checklist
After the cabinets and devices are installed, you need to check the installation items, installation
environment, and cable-related items.
4.12 Powering On a Base Station
This section describes how to power on a base station and handle a failure in the power supply
to the components in a cabinet.
4.13 Subsequent Operations
This section describes the subsequent operations to be performed after a base station is upgraded
and checked.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

531

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

4.1 Introduction to Upgrade


This section describes configuration of enhanced cabinets after being upgraded and reuse
procedures.

4.1.1 Restrcutured Cabinets Interior


To meet requirements in different outdoor environments, Huawei provides various cabinets for
the separated macro base station such as BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2) and distributed base station
such as DBS3900 (Ver.D_A2). The cabinets include the APM30H (Ver.D_A2), TMC11H
(Ver.D_A2), RFC (Ver.D_A), and IBBS200T (Ver.D_A2), which provide different functions.
The RFC is used only for the BTS3900A.

APM30H interior
The following figure shows the APM30H interior.
Figure 4-1 APM30H interior

The following table describes the components in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

532

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Table 4-1 Components in the APM30H


N
o.

Compo
nent

Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nda
tor
y

Max
imu
m
Qua
ntit
y in
a
Sin
gle
Cab
inet

Description

Heat
exchang
er core

Ma
ndat
ory

The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air
circulation, and exchanges internal and external air. In this
way, it lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and
protects the cabinet from dust.

Fan
assembl
y

Ma
ndat
ory

A fan assembly is configured with fans and a central


monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA), dissipating heat from the
cabinet.

SLPU

Ma
ndat
ory

l To provide protection for trunk signals, a signal lightning


protection unit (SLPU) is mandatory and installed in the
top 1 U space of the cabinet. It is configured with the
universal E1/T1 lightning protection unit (UELP) or
universal FE lightning protection unit (UFLP).
l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU is
optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU. It
is configured with two universal signal lightning
protection unit 2 (USLP2) boards.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

ELU

Ma
ndat
ory

The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type


automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

Door
status
sensor

Ma
ndat
ory

It reports the door status, whether open or closed.

EPU

Ma
ndat
ory

The Embedded Power subrack Unit (EPU) converts AC


power into DC power and feeds power to the devices inside
the cabinet. The EPU consists of the EPU subrack, PMU, and
PSUs.

BBU390
0

Ma
ndat
ory

The BBU3900 processes the baseband signals and enables


the base station and the base station controller to interact.

GATM

Opt
iona
l

The GSM Antenna and TMA Control module (GATM)


reports the RET control signal alarms.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

533

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

N
o.

Compo
nent

Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nda
tor
y

Max
imu
m
Qua
ntit
y in
a
Sin
gle
Cab
inet

Description

EMUA

Opt
iona
l

An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) monitors


the environment in a cabinet and processes alarms.

10

AC
heater

Opt
iona
l

The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet work


within the acceptable temperature range when the
surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1 U
space at the bottom of the cabinet. If both an AC heater and
an SOU are configured, the heater is installed in the 1 U space
above the SOU.

11

SOU

Opt
iona
l

The SOU can be installed in the 1 U space at the bottom of


the cabinet, transferring AC power supply to the customer
equipment.

TMC11H Interior
There are two types of TMC11H:
l

One type of TMC11H houses the BBU3900 and uses the -48 V DC power supply, as shown
in illustration A in the following figure.

The other type of TMC11H houses only transmission equipment, as shown in illustration
B in the following figure.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

534

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-2 TMC11H interior

The following table describes the components in the TMC11H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

535

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Table 4-2 Components in the TMC11H


N
o.

Compo
nent

Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nda
tor
y

Max
imu
m
Qua
ntity
in a
Sing
le
Cabi
net

Description

Heat
exchange
r core

Ma
ndat
ory

The heat exchanger core promotes the inner and outer air
circulation, and exchanges internal and external air. In this
way, it lowers the operating temperature of the cabinet and
protects the cabinet from dust.

Fan
assembly

Ma
ndat
ory

A fan assembly is configured with fans and a central


monitoring unit type EA (CMUEA), dissipating heat from
the cabinet.

SLPU

Ma
ndat
ory

l To provide protection for trunk signals, an SLPU is


mandatory and installed in the top 1 U space of the
cabinet. It is configured with the UELP or UFLP.
l To provide protection for monitoring signals, an SLPU
is optional and installed in the 1 U space below the BBU.
It is configured with two USLP2s.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

ELU

Ma
ndat
ory

The electronic label unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type


automatically to facilitate troubleshooting.

Door
status
sensor

Ma
ndat
ory

It reports the door status, whether open or closed.

DCDU

Ma
ndat
ory

The direct current distribution unit (DCDU) is 1 U high and


it provides ten DC power outputs for components in the
TMC. The DCDU-12B is used for the DC-powered
distributed base stations. The DCDU-12C is used for the
DC-powered macro base stations and transmission cabinets.

BBU390
0

Ma
ndat
ory

The BBU3900 processes the baseband signals and enables


the base station and the base station controller to interact.

EMUA

Opt
iona
l

An environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA) monitors


the environment in a cabinet and processes alarms. The
EMUA must be configured when more than 16 Boolean
alarm inputs are required. It is installed in the 1 U space
below the BBU.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

536

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

N
o.

Compo
nent

Op
tio
nal
or
Ma
nda
tor
y

Max
imu
m
Qua
ntity
in a
Sing
le
Cabi
net

Description

AC
heater

Opt
iona
l

The AC heater ensures that components in the cabinet work


within the acceptable temperature range when the
surrounding temperature is low. It can be installed in the 1
U space at the bottom of the cabinet.

RFC Interior
The Radio Frequency Cabinet (RFC) is used by the BTS3900A and provides installation space
for RFUs.
The following figure shows the RFC interior.
Figure 4-3 RFC interior

The following table describes the components in the RFC.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

537

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Table 4-3 Components in the RFC


No.

Module/
Board

Optional
or
Mandato
ry

Maximum Description
Quantity
in a Single
Cabinet

CMUEA
assembly

Mandator
y

The Central Monitoring Unit type EA


(CMUEA) assembly consists of the support
and CMUEA.

DCDU-13
A

Mandator
y

The DCDU-13A is a direct current


distribution unit. It provides four 30 A and
-48 V DC power outputs.

ELU
assembly

Mandator
y

The ELU assembly consists of a support


and an electronic label unit (ELU). The
ELU automatically reports the cabinet type.

Fan
assembly

Mandator
y

A fan assembly dissipates heat from the


cabinet. It contains two standalone fans.

RFUs

Mandator
y

Radio frequency units (RFUs) are used in


macro base stations. They perform
modulation and demodulation of baseband
signals and RF signals, data processing,
power amplifying, and VSWR test.

IBBS200T Interior
The following figure shows the IBBS200T interior.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

538

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-4 IBBS200T interior

The following table describes the components in the IBBS200T.


Table 4-4 Components in the IBBS200T

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No.

Module/
Board

Optional
or
Mandato
ry

Maximum Description
Quantity
in a Single
Cabinet

TEC

Mandator
y

The TEC cooler ensures the normal


operation of the IBBS200T in hightemperature areas and dissipates heat for
the storage batteries.

Transfer
terminal
for the
signal
cable

Mandator
y

It provides ports for alarms reported by the


door status sensor, TEC, temperature
sensor for storage batteries, and smoke
sensor.

Power
distributio
n box

Mandator
y

The power distribution box is installed on


the lower inner right wall of the cabinet. It
transfers and distributes power to the fan or
TEC and storage batteries.

Storage
battery

Mandator
y

The storage batteries provide long-duration


backup power for base stations.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

539

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

No.

Module/
Board

Optional
or
Mandato
ry

Maximum Description
Quantity
in a Single
Cabinet

Transfer
terminal
for the
input
power
cable for
the TEC

Mandator
y

It provides power input ports for the TEC.

4.1.2 Restructuring Process


This section describes the hardware restructuring process during the upgrade from BTS3900A
(Ver.A) to BTS3900A (Ver.D_A2).

Restructuring Process in AC Scenarios


The following figure shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied
with AC power.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

540

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-5 Restructuring process

Restructuring Process in DC Scenarios


Figure 4-6 shows the process of restructuring the cabinets at a BTS3900A site supplied with
DC power.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

541

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-6 Restructuring process

4.2 Installation Preparations


This chapter lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before the installation. It also
specifies the skills that the engineering personnel must have.

4.2.1 Pre-upgrade Check


This section describes the operations that must be taken before the hardware upgrade.
You need to perform the following operations before the hardware upgrade:
l

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Check the running status of the base station and verify that the base station runs properly
before the upgrade.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

542

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Check the exteriors of the cabinets and verify that the cabinets are not damaged or distorted.
Otherwise, the hardware upgrade cannot be performed for the cabinets, and you need to
contact Huawei technical engineers and submit a relocation application to the customer.

4.2.2 Upgrade Preparations


This section describes the preparations needed for the upgrade.
Table 4-5 lists the requirements on the current software version of the base station before the
upgrade.
Table 4-5 Versions before the upgrade
Product Name

Version before Upgrade

SingleRAN7.0 series

V100R007C00SPC240 and later

SingleRAN6.0 series

V100R004C00SPC190 and later

4.2.3 Document Preparations


This section lists the documents that must be obtained before the installation.
l

Before the installation, familiarize yourself with related information in the following
documents:
BTS3900A (Ver.A) Hardware Description
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Hardware Description
APM30H&TMC11H&IBBS200T (Ver.A) User Guide
BTS3900A&DBS3900 Post-Upgrade Hardware Description
BTS3900A (Ver.A) Installation Guide
BTS3900A (Ver.D) Installation Guide
BTS3900A (Ver.A) Site Maintenance Guide
Safety Precautions

During the installation, refer to the following document:


Installation Reference

4.2.4 Tools and Instruments


This section lists the tools and instruments that must be obtained before installation.
Marker

Phillips screwdriver (M3 to


M6)

Diagonal pliers

Flat-head screwdriver (M3 to


M6)

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

543

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

32 mm (1.26 in.)
combination wrench

Socket wrench

Torque wrench

Power cable crimping tool

RJ45 crimping tool

Cable cutter

Rubber mallet

Soldering iron

Wire stripper

Hammer drill (16)

Heat gun

Level

Multimeter

Measuring tape

Vacuum cleaner

ESD wrist strap

ESD gloves

Torque screwdriver

Gloves

4.2.5 Skills and Requirements for Onsite Personnel


Onsite personnel must be qualified and trained. Before performing any operation, onsite
personnel must be familiar with correct operation methods and safety precautions.
Before the installation, pay attention to the following items:
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

544

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

The customer's technical engineers must be trained by Huawei and be familiar with the
proper installation and operation methods.

The number of onsite personnel depends on the engineering schedule and installation
environment. Generally, only three to five onsite personnel are necessary.

4.3 Unpacking Check


Unpack and check the delivered equipment to ensure that all the materials are included and intact.

Context
NOTE

When transporting, moving, or installing the equipment, components, or parts, you must:
l

Prevent them from colliding with doors, walls, shelves, or other objects.

Wear clean gloves, and avoid touching the equipment, components, or parts with bare hands, sweatsoaked gloves, or dirty gloves.

NOTICE
l Powered on a cabinet or BBU within 7 days after unpacking it.
l Power on an RRU within 24 hours after unpacking it.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the total number of articles in each case according to the packing list.
If...

Then...

The total number tallies with the packing


list

Go to Step 2.

The total number does not tally with the


packing list

Find out the cause and report any missing


articles to the local Huawei office.

Step 2 Check the exterior of the packing case.


If...

Then...

The exterior of the packing case is intact

Go to Step 3.

The outer packing is severely damaged or Find out the cause and report any missing
soaked
articles to the local Huawei office.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

545

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

If...

Then...

The mark on the shockwatch label is red.

Do not open the case. Claim compensation


from the transportation company.

Step 3 Check the type and quantity of the equipment in the cases according to the packing list.
If...

Then...

Types and quantity of the article tally with Sign the Packing List with the customer.
those on the packing list
There are any goods missing, incorrectly
delivered, or damaged

Send feedback to the local Huawei office.

CAUTION
To protect the equipment and prevent damage to the equipment, you are advised to keep the
unpacked equipment and packing materials indoors, take photos of the stocking environment,
packing case or carton, packing materials, and any rusted or eroded equipment, and then file the
photos.
----End

4.4 Restructuring the APM30H Cabinet


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing components in the APM30H
cabinet to be restructured.

4.4.1 Information You Need to Know Before Restructuring the


APM30H
This section describes the components and cables to be reused, replaced, removed, and added
during the restructuring of the APM30H.

Component Changes in the APM30H


Figure 4-7 shows component changes in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

546

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-7 Components in the APM30H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

Front door

To be
replace
d

The front door needs to be replaced to enhance the heat


dissipation capacity of the cabinet.

PMU

To be
replace
d

Fan
assembly

To be
replace
d

The fan assembly needs to be replaced to enhance the


heat dissipation capacity.

PSU (AC/
DC)

To be
replace
d

The PSUs need to be replaced to enhance the power


distribution capability.

Door status
sensor

To be
reused

Power
subrack
(AC/DC)

To be
replace
d

The power subrack (AC/DC) needs to be replaced with


an EPU 05 to meet the power requirement of a large
configuration.

PDU

To be
replace
d

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

547

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

No.

Compone
nt

Chang
e Type

Description

BBU3900

To be
reused

GATM

To be
remove
d

10

EMUA

To be
reused

The environment monitoring unit type A (EMUA)


monitors the environment in a cabinet and processes
alarms. The EMUA must be configured when more than
16 Boolean alarm inputs are required. It is installed in the
1 U space below the BBU.

AC heater

To be
reused

SLPU

Added

An SLPU can be added according to customer


requirements.

ELU

Added

The ELU reports the cabinet type automatically. It needs


to be added to facilitate troubleshooting.

Cable Changes in the APM30H


Figure 4-8 lists the power cable and equipotential cable changes in the APM30H.
Figure 4-8 Equipotential cable and power cables in the APM30H

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

548

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

Cable

One End

The Other End

Connecto
r

Installati
on
Position

Connecto
r

Installatio
n Position

Chang
e Type

P0

PGND
cable for
the front
door

OT
terminal

Ground
point on
the inner
wall of the
APM30H

OT
terminal

Front door
of the
APM30H

To be
replace
d

P1

GATM
power
cable

To be
remove
d

P2

GATM
power
cable

To be
remove
d

P3

EMUA
power
cable

OT
terminal

LOAD3
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30H

Cord end
terminal

PWR1
terminal on
the EMUA

To be
reused

P4

HEUA
power
cable

OT
terminal

LOAD4
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30H

3V3
connector

PWR1 port
on the
HEUA

To be
replace
d

P5

BBU
power
cable

OT
terminal

LOAD5
terminal on
the PDU in
the
APM30H

3V3
connector

-48V port
on the BBU

To be
replace
d

Figure 4-9 shows the signal cable changes in the APM30H.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

549

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-9 Signal cable changes in the APM30H

No.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Change
Type

S0

Monitoring
signal cable
for the
IBBS200T

OT terminal

Junction
terminal for
the
monitoring
signal cable
in the
IBBS200T

RJ45
connector

HPMI in the
APM30H

To be
reused

S1

HPMIPMU
monitoring
signal cable

To be
removed

S2

PMUHEUA
monitoring
signal cable

To be
removed

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

550

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

No.

Cable

One End

The Other End

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Connector

Installatio
n Position

Change
Type

S3

HEUAGATM1
monitoring
signal cable

To be
removed

S4

GATM0BBU
monitoring
signal cable

To be
removed

S5

FMUAGATM0
monitoring
signal cable

To be
removed

S6

GATM1BBU
monitoring
signal cable

To be
removed

S7

EMUA
monitoring
signal cable

DB9 male
connector

RS485 port
on the
EMUA

RJ45
connector

RS232/
RS422 port
on the PMU

To be
reused

S8

GPS clock
signal cable

Type N
female
connector

GPS surge
protector

SMA male
connector

GPS port on
the USCU in
the BBU

To be
reused

S9

GPS jumper

N50 straight
male
connector

GPS surge
protector

N50 straight
male
connector

GPS
antenna

To be
reused

4.4.2 Replacing the Front Door


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the front door.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, a torque wrench, an ESD box or bag, a cable cutter, and a pair of needlenose pliers.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

551

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Set the SW4 circuit breaker on the PDU to OFF. This circuit breaker controls the power supply
to the fan assembly.
NOTE

l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the DBS3900, the SW2 circuit breaker controls the power supply
to the fans.
l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the BTS3900A, the SW4 circuit breaker controls the power supply
to the fans.

Step 3 Remove the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door from the fan transfer
board, and then cut the cable ties on these cables.
Figure 4-10 Removing the monitoring signal transfer cables for the fans on the front door

Step 4 Remove the equipotential cable between the door and the inner wall of the cabinet, as shown in
Figure 4-11.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

552

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-11 Removing the equipotential cable for the cabinet door

Step 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove three hinges on the cabinet door and then remove the
cabinet door, as shown in Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-12 Removing the front door

Step 6 Install the new front door.


NOTE

l One end of an equipotential cable has been connected to the new front door before delivery.
l Two persons are required for installing the front door.

1.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

One person lifts the new front door to align the hinges with the holes in the cabinet, and
the other person uses a torque screwdriver to tighten the three hinges to the cabinet to 1.4
Nm (12.39 lbfin.).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

553

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

2.

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Connect the other end of the equipotential cable to the ground screw on the inner wall.

Step 7 Check whether there is a barcode label on the inner left wall of the cabinet and that the barcode
number starts with 212102.
l If there is such a barcode label on the cabinet, skip this step. Figure 4-13 shows the position
of the barcode label that is supposed to be on the inner wall of the cabinet.
l If there is no such a barcode label on the inner wall of the cabinet, record the number on the
barcode label that is stuck on the front door, and stick a label carrying the same number to
the corresponding position on the inner wall of the cabinet. Figure 4-13 shows the position
of the barcode label on the front door of the cabinet.
Figure 4-13 Positions of the barcode labels

(1) Position of the barcode label on the inner wall of the (2) Position of the barcode label on the front door of the
cabinet
cabinet

Step 8 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

4.4.3 Replacing the Fan Assembly


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the fan assembly.

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
flat-head screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

554

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Set the SW4 circuit breaker on the PDU to OFF. This circuit breaker controls the power supply
to the fan assembly.
NOTE

l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the DBS3900, the SW2 circuit breaker controls the power supply
to the fans.
l When the APM30 or APM30H is used in the BTS3900A, the SW4 circuit breaker controls the power supply
to the fans.

Step 3 Remove the fan assembly.


1.

Record the cable connections on the fan assembly, and remove the cables. Attach temporary
labels at one end of all cables before removing them for recording cable connections.

2.

Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four screws from the mounting ears of the fan
assembly, and gently pull the fan assembly out of the cabinet along the guide rails, as shown
in the following figure.
NOTE

When removing the fan assembly, do not touch the air intake vent at the bottom of the fan assembly.

Figure 4-14 Removing the fan assembly

3.

Place the removed fan assembly into the ESD box or bag.

Step 4 Install a new fan assembly. Push the new fan assembly into the installation position, and tighten
the four M6x12 screws on the mounting ears of the fan assembly to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.).

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

555

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-15 Installing the new fan assembly

Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

4.4.4 Installing an ELU


This section describes the procedure and precautions for installing the electronic label unit
(ELU).

Prerequisites
The following tools and materials are available: an ESD wrist strap or a pair of ESD gloves, a
Phillips screwdriver, and an ESD box or bag.

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Use two M4x8 screws to secure the ELU on the ELU base to 1.2 Nm (10.62 lbfin.).
Step 3 Remove the adhesive paper off the bottom of the ELU base, and stick the ELU base on the
position shown in the following figure.
NOTE

Press the ELU for about 1 minute to ensure that it is securely stuck on the inner wall of the cabinet.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

556

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-16 Installing the ELU base

Step 4 Install the ELU case.


Step 5 Take off the ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and pack up all tools.
----End

4.4.5 Replacing the Power System


This section describes the procedure and precautions for replacing the power system.

Prerequisites
Before replacing the power system, ensure that the entire base station has been powered off.

Context
l

Replacing the power system interrupts all the services carried on the base station.

The following figure shows the power systems before and after the upgrade. A shows the
exterior of the power subrack without the cover before the upgrade. B shows the exterior
of the power subrack after the upgrade.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

557

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

Figure 4-17 Power systems before and after the upgrade

(1) PMU

(2) PSU

(3) PDU

(4) Power subrack

Procedure
Step 1 Put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.

NOTICE
Take proper ESD protection measures, for example, put on an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves,
to prevent electrostatic damage to the boards, modules, or electronic components.
Step 2 Instruct the element management system (EMS) administrator to block all the carriers of this
base station.
Step 3 Power off the base station.
1.

Set the Bat circuit breaker on the wiring unit of the power subrack to OFF.

2.

Shut off the external power for the APM30H.

Step 4 Remove all cables from the power system.


1.

Remove all monitoring signal cables from the PMU.

2.

Remove power cables for storage batteries from the BAT(+) and BAT(-) terminals on the
wiring unit of the power subrack.

3.

Remove all cables from the PDU panel. The cables include the PGND cable, AC input
power cables, AC and DC output power cables, and AC and DC surge protection signal
cables.

Step 5 Remove the power system.


1.

Use a flat-head screwdriver to loosen the screws on the ejector lever of the PMU or PSU
panel.

2.

Pull the handle slightly to slide the PMU or PSU out of the subrack and remove the PMU
or PSU from the subrack, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

558

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-18 Removing the PMU or PSU

3.

Remove the screws on both sides of the power subrack (AC/DC), and gently pull the power
subrack (AC/DC) out of the cabinet.

4.

Remove the screws on both sides of the PDU, and gently pull the PDU out of the cabinet.

5.

Place the removed AC or DC power subrack, PMU, PSUs, and PDU into the ESD box or
bag.

Step 6 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner left side of the
cabinet

CAUTION
If the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC
(35.6oF to 37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperature
alarms.
1.

Remove the guide rails in the positions shown in the following figure.
Figure 4-19 Removing the guide rails

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

559

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

2.

Remove the guide rail on the left side of the position where the power subrack is originally
installed, as shown by a in the following figure. Dispose of the guide rail and reserve the
screws.

3.

Fit the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding into the gap between the mounting
bar and the plate behind the mounting bar. Ensure that the windproof cotton padding
contacts with the inner left wall of the cabinet closely, as shown by b in the following figure.

4.

Use the two M5 screws reserved in Step 6.2 to secure the guide rail attached with windproof
cotton padding, and tighten the screws to 3 Nm (26.55 lbfin.), as shown by c in the
following figure.
Figure 4-20 Installing the guide rail attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner
left side of the cabinet

Step 7 Optional: Install windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet. If there are
other modules installed at the bottom of the cabinet, skip this step.
1.

Take out the windproof cotton padding and strip the adhesive paper off the windproof cotton
padding for about 3 cm (1.18 in.), as shown by a in the following figure.

2.

Place the windproof cotton patting on the bottom right side of the cabinet, and completely
strip the adhesive paper to securely stick the windproof cotton padding on bottom of the
cabinet. These operations are shown by b and c in the following figure.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

560

BTS3900A
Installation Guide for Enhancing Existing Cabinets

4 Upgrade from BTS3900A (Ver.A) to BTS3900A


(Ver.D_A2)

Figure 4-21 Installing windproof cotton padding on the bottom right side of the cabinet

Step 8 Install the mounting part attached with windproof cotton padding on the inner right wall of the
cabinet

CAUTION
If the windproof cotton padding is not installed, the temperature will increase by 2oC to 3oC
(35.6oF to 37.4oF) at the air intake vent for the BBU and BBU boards will report overtemperature
alarms.
1.

Remove the M6 screw at the bottom of the right mounting bar.

2.

Attach the windproof cotton padding to the inner right wall of the cabinet, use three M6
screws to secure it, and tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17.70 lbfin.), as shown in the following
figure.

Issue 06 (2014-04-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co.,